Some symbolic expressions for number eight

Share it with your friends Like

Thanks! Share it with your friends!

Close

Some symbolic expressions for number eight

CONTENS

अनुष्टुभ् अष्टक अष्टन् अहि इभ करिन् कुण्जर कुम्भिन् गज गजः गिरि द्विप पूर्व भुजंग भुजंगः भुजंगम भुजंगमः वसु व्याल सिन्धुर

अनुष्टुभ् — anuṣṭubh Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899anuṣṭubh «anu-ṣṭubh» («stubh») to praise after, to follow in praising

anuṣṭubh «anu-ṣṭubh» «p» (nom. «-ṣṭuk» f. following in praise or

invocation; a kind of metre consisting of four Pādas or quarter-verses of

eight syllables each (according to the , quoted in , so called because it

«anuṣṭobhati» i.e. follows with its praise the Gāyatrī, which consists of

three Pādas) ; (in later metrical systems, the Anuṣṭubh constitutes a

whole class of metres, consisting of four times eight syllables); hence the

number eight; speech, Sarasvatī ; (mfn.), praising

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

anuṣṭubh 1 P. (-stubh) To praise after, follow in praising.

anuṣṭubh f. [anu niraṁtaraṁ stubhyate’nayā anuṣṭup vāk]

(1) Following in praise; speech.

(2) Sarasvatī.

(3) N. of a class of metres consisting of four Padas of 8 syllables each,

the whole stanza consisting of 32 syllables (so called because it follows

with its praise i. e. anuṣṭobhati the gayatrī, which has 3 Padas),

anuṣṭobhanādanuṣṭup. In later metrical systems it stands as a general

name for all metres which have 8 syllables in each foot (the highest

possible number being computed to be 256); paṁcamaṁ laghu sarvatra

saptamaṁ dvicaturthayoḥ . guru ṣaṣṭhaṁ ca pādānāṁ śeṣeṣvaniyamo

mataḥ .. which rule is sometimes violated.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

anuṣṭubh (von stubh mit anu) f. 1) «lauter Anruf(?)»: anuṣṭubhamanu

carcūrya māṇāmandraṁ ni cikyuḥ kavayo manīṣāḥ ṚV. 10, 124, 9. «Rede»

NAIGH. 1, 11. TRIK. 3, 3, 283. MED. bh. 24. ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — 2) N.

eines in seiner Grundform aus vier achtsilbigen Pāda’s bestehenden

Versmaasses, das nachmals in den Śloka übergegangen ist.

dvātriṁśadakṣarānuṣṭupcatvāro ‘ṣṭākṣarāḥ samāḥ ṚV. PRĀT. 16, 27. ṚV.

10, 130, 4. VS. 8, 47. 10, 13. AV. 8, 9, 14. 20. ŚAT. BR. 3, 1, 4, 2. 21. 14,

8, 15, 8. (= BṚH. ĀR. UP. 5, 14, 5.) anuṣṭupsaṁpad 7, 1, 2, 15. In der

späteren Metrik umfasst Anuṣṭubh eine ganze Klasse von Metren, die aus

4 x 8 Silben bestehen, COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 152. 159. TRIK. 3, 3, 283.

MED. bh. 24. ist aus Brahma’s nördlichem Munde entstanden VP. 42.

anuṣṭubh 3) Bez. «der Zahl acht» Ind. St. 8, 167. — Vgl. ānuṣṭubha.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

anuṣṭubh a. shouting after. f. shout, praise; N. of a metre.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

anuṣṭubh anu-ṣṭubh, a. shouting after; f. song of praise; a metre 4 X 8

syllables.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

anuṣṭubh strī anu + stunbha—kvip ṣatvam . sarasvatyām,

aṣṭākṣarapādake, chandobhede vāci ca . anuṣṭupchanda iti ya° 15, 5, anu

nirantaraṁ stubhyate’nayā anuṣṭup vāk vāgeva saṁstup chandaḥ

vāganuṣṭup chanda iti śruteriti vedadī° . anuṣṭobhanādanuṣṭubiti

brāhmaṇe niruktiḥ . gāyatryuṣṇiganuṣṭup ceti vṛtta° . anuṣṭup ca dvividhā

yathā kathañcidaaṣṭākṣarapādikā jātiḥ, viśeṣasanniveśayuktākṣaraṁ

chandaśca . tatra jāteḥ 256 bhedāḥ . pañcamaṁ laghu sarvatra

saptamaṁ dvicaturthayoḥ . guru ṣaṣṭhañca pādānāṁ śeṣerṣvaniyamo

mata iti chandomañjaryuktalakṣaṇaṁ dvitīyam . tasya ca

pañcamalaghutvaṁ vyabhicarati ca yiyakṣamāṇenāhūta iti māghaḥ .

tasya ca mātrāvṛttarūpatvaṁ yathā prayoge prāyikaṁ prāhuḥ

ke’pyetadvaktalakṣaṇam . loke’nuṣṭubiti khyātam tasyāṣṭākṣaratā kṛteti

chandoma° . ataeva vṛttaratākare vaktraṁ nādyānnasau syā

mabderyo’nuṣṭubhi khyātamiti vaktranāmatoktā . varṇavṛttasya tu

vitānamiti nāma yathoktaṁ vṛttaratnākare vitānamābhyāṁ yadanyaditi .

ābhyāṁ samānikāpramāṇikābhyāmanyat sarvamityarthaḥ . atha

chandāṁsi gāyatryuṣṇiganuṣṭubvṛhatīpaṅktitriṣṭu bityādyupakramya

caturviśatyakṣarādīni caturuttarāṇi, ūnādhikenaikena nicṛdbhūrijau,

dvābhyāṁ virāṭsvarājau, pādapūraṇārthaṁ tu

kṣiprasaṁyogaikākṣarībhāvāt vyūhediti anādeśe’ṣṭākṣarāḥ

pādāścatuṣpadāścarca iti tṛtīyamanuṣṭubiti ca kātyā° sarvānukra°

śucimanuṣṇihā prāṇamanuṣṭubheti yaju° .

अष्टक — aṣṭaka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899aṣṭaka mf («ā» or «ikā», śulb.; cf. n. consisting of eight parts &c.

aṣṭaka mf («ā» or «ikā») n. one who is acquainted with the eight books of

Pāṇini’s grammar

aṣṭaka m. N. of a son of Viśvāmitra (author of the hymn RV. x, 104) &c.

aṣṭaka («ā») f. the eighth day after full moon (especially that in the

months Hemanta and śiśira, on which the progenitors or manes are

worshipped &c.; «aṣṭakā» is therefore also a N. of the worship itself or

the oblations offered on those days &c.) &c.

aṣṭaka («ā») f. a N. of the Acchodā river

aṣṭaka n. a whole consisting of eight parts (as each of the eight Aṣṭakas

of the , or as Pāṇini’s grammar &c.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

aṣṭaka a. [aṣṭa parimāṇamasya kan] Consisting of 8 parts, eight-fold;

krodhajo’pi gaṇo’ṣṭakaḥ Ms. 7. 48. —kaḥ

(1) [aṣṭakaṁ (pāṇineḥ), vidaṁti adhīyate vā ityaṣṭakāḥ P. IV. 2. 65

Sk.] One who studies or is acquainted with the eight books of Pāṇini’s

grammar.

(2) N. of a son of Viśvāmitra. —kā [aśnaṁti pitaro’syāṁ tithau aś-

takan Uṇ. 3. 148]

(1) A collection of three days (7th, 8th, and 9th) beginning from the

seventh day after the full moon.

(2) The 8th day of three months on which the Manes are to be

propitiated.

(3) A Śrāddha to be performed on the above days; worship of the

Manes on certain days.

(4) The 8th day of a month; Ms. 4. 113—4. —kaṁ

(1) A whole consisting of 8 parts.

(2) The 8 chapters of Paṇini’s sūtras; aṣṭāvadhyāyāḥ parimāṇamasya

ityaṣṭakaṁ; pāṇineḥ sūtraṁ Sk.).

(3) The study of the Sūtras.

(4) A division of the Ṛgveda (it being divided into 8 Aṣṭakas or 10

Maṇḍalas).

(5) Any group of eight; as vānarāṣṭakaṁ, tārāṣṭakaṁ, gaṁgāṣṭakaṁ

&c.

(6) The number eight.

— Comp.

—aṁgaḥ, —gaṁ a kind of board or cloth for playing with dice on

(having eight divisions).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

aṣṭaka (von aṣṭan) 1) adj. f. ā. a) «achttheilig, achtfach»: aṣṭakā vā ukhā

nidhiḥ ŚAT. BR. 6, 2, 2, 25. ṚV. PRĀT. 16, 46. 50. krodhajo ‘pi gaṇo

‘ṣṭakaḥ M. 7, 48. catvāro ‘ṣṭakā (sc. pādāḥ «vier achtsilbige Verse»)

jāgataśca mahābṛhatī SĀY. in der Einl. zu ṚV. 1, 105. aṣṭakavarga Verz.

d. B. H. No. 857. 858. 878. f. aṣṭikā P. 7, 3, 45, Vārtt. 10, Sch. — b) «der

die acht grammatischen Bücher» Pāṇini’s «studirt» oder «dieselben kennt»

P. 4, 2, 65, Sch. Vgl. u. 4. — 2) m. a) «ein Achtel», z. B. in der

äusserlichen Eintheilung des ṚV. — b) N. pr. ein Sohn Viśvāmitra’s AIT.

BR. 7, 17. ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 14. MBH. 1, 3539. 3569. 3, 8465. 13301. 12, 6200.

HARIV. 1462. 1473. 1775. fg. LIA. I, Anh. XIX, N. nach ṚV. ANUKR.

Verfasser von 10, 104. ein Bein. Śiśu’s, weil dieser «sieben» Mütter und

«einen» Vater (Skanda) hatte, MBH. 3, 14398. Er führt auch den

Beinamen navaka. aṣṭakās «das Geschlecht der» Aṣṭaka Verz. d. B. H. 57,

11. — 3) f. a) aṣṭakā Uṇ. 3, 146. «der achte Tag nach dem Vollmonde»

AV. 15, 16, 2. ŚAT. BR. 6, 2,2, 23. fgg. 4, 2, 10. KĀTY. ŚR. 13, 1, 2.

KAUŚ. 138. amāvāsyācaturdaśayoḥ paurṇamāsyaṣṭakāsu ca M. 4, 113.

aṣṭakāpaurṇamāsyau 114. aṣṭakāyām YĀJÑ. 1, 143. So heissen

insbesondere diese Tage in den Monaten des Hemanta und Śiśira, an

welchen ein Manenopfer gebracht wird; auch dieses Opfer selbst.

hemantaśiśirayoścaturṇāmaparapakṣāṇāmaṣṭamīṣvaṣṭakāḥ ĀŚV. GṚHY.

2, 4. M. 4, 119. 150. YĀJÑ. 1, 217. NĀR. zu ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. in ZdmG.7,

527, N. 2. aṣṭakāhomaḥ KAUŚ. 138. aṣṭakākarman Verz. d. B. H. No.

1071. aṣṭakā pitṛdaivatyamityayaṁ prasṛto janaḥ R. 2, 108, 14. Vgl. P. 7,

3, 45, Vārtt. 10 und anvaṣṭakā. — b) aṣṭakī s. u. anvaṣṭakā. — 4) n. greek

«ein aus acht Theilen bestehendes Ganzes»: aṣṭakaiḥ ṣaḍbhiḥ ŚVETĀŚV.

UP. 1, 4. saptasaptakavettāhamaṣṭāṣṭakavibhūṣitaḥ R. 3, 53, 41.

pratigrahaprāptahemamāṣāṣṭako dvijaḥ KATHĀS. 6, 51. mūrtyaṣṭaka

VOP. 5, 34. aṣṭakaṁ pāṇineḥ sūtram P. 4. 2, 65, Sch. aṣṭāvadhyāyāḥ

parimāṇamasya. aṣṭakaṁ pāṇinīyam 5, 1, 58, Sch.

aṣṭaka 1) a) -varga «die aus Achten» (den) 7 Planeten und dem Lagna

«bestehende Gruppe», Titel des 9ten Adhyāya in VARĀH. BṚH. — 2) a) zu

streichen, da aṣṭaka als Abtheilung des ṚV. und der TS. als neutr. zu 4)

gehört und seinen Namen daher hat, dass es auch wieder aus «acht»

Theilen besteht. — 3) a) Sp. 530, Z. 8 ist aṣṭakāpitṛdaivatyam (-

pitṛdevatyam ed. Bomb.) als comp. zu fassen: aṣṭakāḥ pitṛdaivatyaḥ R.

ed. GORR. 2, 116, 23. — c) aṣṭakā (wie auch amāvāsyā) ein anderer

Name der Acchodā Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,40. — 4) aṣṭāṣṭaka «acht

Octaden» d. i. «vierundsechzig» R. 3, 53, 41. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 53, 55. adj.

«aus 64 bestehend» 81, 32.

aṣṭaka adj. aṣṭikā khārī PAT. a. a. O.7,116,a.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

aṣṭaka See under Āṣṭika.

aṣṭaka 1 I A King of the Pūru dyansty.

aṣṭaka 2 II A Rājarṣi born to Viśvāmitra of Mādhavī, wife of Yayāti.

(Śloka 18, Chapter 119, Udyoga Parva, M.B.). See under Gālava.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

aṣṭaka aṣṭaka, i. e. aṣṭan + ka.

I. adj. Eight-fold, Man. 7, 48.

II. f. kā.

1. The eighth day after the full moon, Man. 4, 113; especially those on

which the Pitṛs or Manes are worshipped.

2. Worship of the Pitṛs, Rām. 2, 108, 14.

III. n. An octad, a collection of eight things.

— Comp. tri-, n. a kind of vessel, Suśr. 1, 171, 19. aṣṭāṣṭaka, i. e. aṣṭan-,

n. sixty-four (arts), Rām. 3, 53, 41.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

aṣṭaka a. eightfold; m. a man’s name; f. ā the eighth day after full moon.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

aṣṭaka aṣṭa-ka, a. eightfold; m. N.;

ā, f. eighth day after full-moon, esp. in Hemanta & Sisira; sacrifice to

the Manes on that day; n. octad;

-guṇa, a. eightfold;

-taya, n. octad;

-dhā, ad. eightfold.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

aṣṭaka na° aṣṭaua adhyāyāḥ pariṇāmamasya aṣṭan + kan . 1

pāṇineraṣṭādhyāyīsūtre, pratyekamaṣṭādhyāyātmake 2 ṛgvedāṁśabhede

ca 3 aṣṭasaṁkhyāparimite tri° paiśunyaṁ sāhasaṁ drohaīrṣyā

sūyārthadūṣaṇam . vāgdaṇḍajañca pāruṣyaṁ krodhajo’pi gaṇo’ṣṭakaḥ

manuḥ . saṁkhyāyāḥ saṁjñāsaṅghasūtrā dhyayaneṣu pā° ukteḥ 3

aṣṭāvṛttādhyayane’pi . aṣṭakaṁ vidaci adhīyate vā sūtrācca kopadhāt pā°

adhyetṛveditṛpralayasya bāhulye luk . aṣṭakāḥ pāṇineḥ 4 sūtrāyādhyāyiṣu

ba° va° . 5 aṣṭasaṁkhyāyām tārāṣṭakamidaṁ puṇyaṁ bhaktimān yaḥ

paṭhennaraḥ tantram . gaṅgāṣṭakaṁ paṭhati yaḥ prayataḥ prabhāte

vālmī° .

अष्टन् — aṣṭan Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899aṣṭan «aṣṭau» ([ &c.]) or «aṣṭā» ([ viii, 2, 41]) or «aṣṭa» ([ x, 27, 15

&c.]) pl. eight (other forms are: gen. «aṣṭānām» &c.; instr. «aṣṭabhis»

&c.; loc. «aṣṭāsu» ‘octo’; Gk. [greek]. Goth. ‘ahtau’; Mod. Germ. ‘acht’;

Eng. ‘eight’; Lith. ‘asztuni’; Slav. ‘osmj’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

aṣṭan num. a. [aś-vyāptau kanin tuṭ ca Uṇ. 1. 154.] (nom. acc. aṣṭa-ṣṭau)

Eight. It often occurs in comp. as aṣṭā with numerals and some other

nouns; as aṣṭādaśan, aṣṭāviṁśatiḥ, aṣṭāpada &c. [cf. L. octo; Gr. okto;

Zend. astan; Pers. hasht.].

— Comp.

—akṣara a. consisting of eight letters or parts. (

—raḥ) N. of a metre.

—aṁga a. consisting of eight parts or members. (

—gaṁ) 1. the eight parts of the body with which a very low

obeisance is performed; -pātaḥ, —praṇāmaḥ, sāṣṭāṁganamaskāraḥ a

respectful obeisance made by the prostration of the eight limbs of the

body; sāṣṭāṁgapātaṁ praṇanāma fell prostrate on the ground in

reverence; (jānubhyāṁ ca tathā padbhyāṁ pāṇibhyāmurasā dhiyā . śirasā

vacasā dṛṣṭyā praṇāmo’ṣṭāṁga īritaḥ). —2. the 8 parts of yoga or

concentration; yamo niyamaścāsanaṁ ca prāṇāyāmastataḥ paraṁ .

pratyāhāro dhāraṇā ca dhyānaṁ sārdhaṁ samādhinā .

aṣṭāṁgānyāhuretāni yogināṁ yogasiddhaye … —3. materials of worship

taken collectively. —4. the eight parts of every medical science; (they are:

—śalyaṁ, śālākyaṁ, kāyacikitsā, bhūtavidyā, kaumārabhṛtyaṁ,

agadataṁtraṁ, rasāyanataṁtraṁ, and vājīkaraṇataṁtraṁ). —5. the eight

parts of a court; 1 the law, 2 the judge, 3 assessors, 4 scribe, 5

astrologer, 6 gold, 7 fire, and 8 water. —6. any whole consisting of eight

parts. —7. a die, dice. -arghyaṁ an offering of eight articles. -dhūpaḥ a

sort of medical incense removing fever. -maithunaṁ ‘sexual enjoyment of

8 kinds’; the eight stages in the progress of a love-suit; smaraṇaṁ

kīrtanaṁ keliḥ prekṣaṇaṁ guhyabhāṣaṇaṁ . saṁkalpo’dhyavasāyaśca

kriyāniṣpattireva ca … -hṛdayaṁ N. of a medical work.

—adhyāyī N. of Paṇinī’s grammatical work consisting of 8 Adhyayas

or chapters.

—ara a. having a wheel with 8 spokes.

—asraṁ an octagon.

—asriya a. octangular.

—aha(n) a. lasting for 8 days.

—ādiśābdikāḥ the first eight expounders of the science of words

(grammar); iṁdraścaṁdraḥ kāśakṛtsnāpiśalī śākaṭāyanaḥ .

pāṇinyamarajaineṁdrā jayaṁtyaṣṭādiśābdikāḥ … —kapāla a. (-ṣṭā-)

prepared or offered in ‘eight’ pans. (

—laḥ) a sacrifice in which ghee is offered in eight pans.

—karṇa a. one who has the number eight as a mark burnt in his

ears (P. VI. 3. 115). (

—rṇaḥ) eight-eared, an epithet of Brahmā.

—karman m.),

—gatikaḥ a king who has 8 duties to perform; (they are:

—ādāne ca visarge ca tathā praiṣaniṣedhayoḥ . paṁcame

cārthavacane vyavahārasya cekṣaṇe .. daṁḍaśuddhyoḥ sadā

raktastenāṣṭagatiko nṛpaḥ .. —kṛtvas ind. eight times.

—koṇaḥ 1. an octagon. —2. a kind of machine.

—khaṁḍaḥ a title of a collection of several sections of the Ṛgveda.

—gavaṁ [aṣṭānāṁ gavāṁ samāhāraḥ] a flock of 8 cows.

—gāḍh m. 1. a fabulous animal supposed to have eight legs. —2. a

spider.

—guṇa a. eightfold; annādaṣṭaguṇaṁ cūrṇaṁ;

dāpyoṣṭaguṇamatyayaṁ Ms. 8. 400. (

—ṇaṁ) the eight qualities which a Brāhmaṇa should possess; dayā

sarvabhūteṣu, kṣāṁtiḥ, anasūyā, śaucaṁ, anāyāsaḥ, maṁgalaṁ,

akārpaṇyaṁ, aspṛhā ceti .. Gautama. -āśraya a. endowed with these

eight qualities.

—ṣṭa (ṣṭā) catvāriṁśat a. forty-eight.

—taya a. eight-fold.

—tāriṇī the eight forms of the goddess tāriṇī; tārā cogrā mahogrā

ca vajrā kālī sarasvatī . kāmeśvarī ca cāmuṁḍā ityaṣṭau tāriṇyo matāḥ …

—triṁśat (—ṣṭā) a. thirty-eight.

—trikaṁ [aṣṭāvṛttaṁ trikaṁ] the number 24.

—dalaṁ 1. a lotus having eight petals. —2. an octagon.

—daśan (-ṣṭā-) see below after aṣṭātaya. —diś f. [karma-

saṁjñātvānna dviguḥ] the eight cardinal points; pūrvāgneyī dakṣiṇā ca

nairṛtī paścimā tathā . vāyavī cottaraiśānī diśā aṣṭāvimāḥ smṛtāḥ … —

kariṇyaḥ the eight female elephants living in the eight points;

kariṇyo’bhramukapilāpiṁgalānupamāḥ kramāt . tāmrakarṇī śubhradaṁtī

cāṁganā cāṁjanāvatī .. Ak. -pālāḥ the eight regents of the cardinal

points; iṁdro vahriḥ pitṛpatiḥ (yamaḥ) nairṛto varuṇo marut (vāyuḥ) .

kubera īśaḥ patayaḥ pūrvādīnāṁ diśāṁ kramāt .. Ak. -gajāḥ the eight

elephants guarding the 8 quarters; airāvataḥ puṁḍarīko vāmanaḥ

kumudoṁ’janaḥ . puṣpadaṁtaḥ sārvabhaumaḥ supratīkaśca diggajāḥ ..

Ak.

—dravyaṁ the eight materials of a sacrifice;

aśvatthoḍuṁbaraplakṣanyagrodhasamidhastilāḥ . siddhārthapāyasājyāni

dravyāṇyaṣṭau viṭurbudhāḥ … —dhātuḥ the eight metals taken

collectively; svarṇaṁ rūpyaṁ ca tāmraṁ ca raṁgaṁ yaśadameva ca .

śīsaṁ lauhaṁ rasaśceti dhātavo’ṣṭau prakīrtitāḥ … —pada —d (-ṣṭa or

ṣṭā-) a. 1. eight-footed. —2. a term for a pregnant animal.

—padaḥ (-ṣṭā-) 1. a spider. —2. a fabulous animal called Śarabha.

—3. a worm. —4. a wild sort of jasmin. —5. a pin or bolt. —6. the mountain

Kailasa (the abode of Kubera). (

—daḥ, —daṁ) [aṣṭasu dhātuṣu padaṁ pratiṣṭhā yasya Malli.] 1.

gold; āvarjitāṣṭāpadakuṁbhatoyaiḥ Ku. 7. 10; Śi. 3. 28. —2. a kind of

chequered cloth or a board for drafts, dice-board (Mar. paṭa); —

paricayacaturābhiḥ K. 196. -patraṁ a sheet of gold.

—pa (pā) dikā N. of a plant.

—padī (-ṣṭa-ṣṭā-) 1. wild sort of jasmin. —2. a variety of metre,

often used in Jayadeva’s Gītagovinda.

—palaṁ a kind of medicinal preparation of ghee.

—pādya a. (-ṣṭā-) eight-fold.

—maṁgalaḥ a horse with a white face, tail, mane, breast and

hoofs. (—laṁ) [aṣṭaguṇitaṁ maṁgalaṁ śā- ta-] a collection of eight lucky

things; according to some they are: mṛgarājo vṛṣo nāgaḥ kalaśo

vyaṁjanaṁ tathā . vaijayaṁtī tathā bherī dīpa ityaṣṭamaṁgalam ..;

according to others loke’sminmaṁgalānyaṣṭau brāhmaṇo gaurhutāśanaḥ .

hiraṇyaṁ sarpirāditya āpo rājā tathāṣṭamaḥ … —mānaṁ one kuḍava.

—māsika a. occurring once in 8 months.

—muṣṭiḥ a measure called kuṁci; aṣṭamuṣṭirbhavet kuṁciḥ, —

mūrtiḥ the ‘eight-formed’, an epithet of Śiva; the 8 forms being the 5

elements (earth, water, fire, air and ether), the sun and moon, and the

sacrificing priest; cf S. 1. 1—yā sṛṣṭiḥ sraṣṭurādyā vahati vidhihutaṁ yā

haviryā ca hotrī . yedve kālaṁvidhattaḥ śrutiviṣayaguṇā yā sthitā vyāpya

viśvaṁ . yāmāhuḥ sarvabhūtaprakṛtiriti yayā prāṇinaḥ prāṇavaṁtaḥ .

pratyakṣābhiḥ prapannastanubhiravatu vastābhiraṣṭābhirīśaḥ ..; or, briefly

expressed, the names in Sanskrit (in the above order) are: jalaṁ

vahnistathā yaṣṭā sūryācaṁdramasau tathā . ākāśaṁ vāyuravanī

mūrtayo’ṣṭau pinākinaḥ … -dharaḥ ‘having 8 forms’, Śiva.

—ratnaṁ the eight jewels taken collectively; the title of a collection

of 8 Ślokas on morality.

—rasāḥ the 8 sentiments in dramas &c.;

śṛṁgārahāsyakaruṇaraudravīrabhayānakāḥ . bībhatsādbhutasaṁjñau

cetyaṣṭau nāṭye rasāḥ smṛtāḥ .. K. P. 4 (to which is sometimes added a

9th Rasa called śāṁta; nirvedasthāyibhāvosti śāṁtopi navamo rasaḥ

ibid); -āśraya a. embodying or representing the eight sentiments; V. 2.

18.

—lohakaṁ a class of 8 metals; suvarṇaṁ rajataṁ tāmraṁ sīsakaṁ

kāṁtikaṁ tathā . vaṁgaṁ lauhaṁ tīkṣṇalauhaṁ lauhānyaṣṭāvimāni tu …

—vargaḥ 1. a sort of diagram (cakra) showing the good or bad stars of a

person. —2. the 8 classes of letters; (avarga, ka-, ca-, ṭa-, ta-, pa-, ya-,

śa-,). —3. a class of three principal medicaments.

—vakraḥ (ṣṭā) see below.

—vidha a. [aṣṭa vidhāḥ prakārāḥ asya] eight-fold, of eight kinds.

—viṁśatiḥ f. (-ṣṭā-) [aṣṭādhikā viṁśātiḥ śā. ta.] the number

twenty-eight.

—śataṁ eight hundred.

—śravaṇaḥ, —śravasa N. of Brahma (having 8 ears or four heads).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

aṣṭan ved., aṣṭan klass. Uṇ. 1, 156. ŚĀNT. 2, 5. Decl. P. 7, 1, 21. 2, 84.

VOP. 3, 123. 124. am Ende eines adj. comp. SIDDH.K.22, «a. acht»: aṣṭau

kukabhaḥ ṚV. 1, 38, 8. putrāsaḥ 10, 72, 8. ŚAT. BR. 3, 1, 3, 2. 3. 4, 5, 7,

2. M. 1, 13. 64. 3, 20. u.s.w. HIḌ. 2, 9. 4, 19. N. 5, 34. VIŚV. 3, 18. R. 1,

7, 2. aṣṭau kṛtvaḥ (= aṣṭakṛtvas, s. d.) ŚAT. BR. 1, 3, 2, 7. 9. 9, 3, 2, 8.

10, 4, 2, 20. aṣṭābhiḥ 6, 3, 1, 3. KĀTY. ŚR. 17, 7, 2. ŚĀK. 1. aṣṭānām M.

5, 96. aṣṭāsu ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 3, 23. 9, 3, 2, 8. 10, 4, 2, 20. M. 3, 50. aṣṭa

vīrāsaḥ ṚV. 10, 27, 15. aṣṭā paraḥ sahasrā 8, 2, 41. AV. 5, 15, 8. 11, 8,

29. In Zusammensetzungen mit Zehnern erscheint die Form aṣṭā (P. 6,

3, 47. VOP. 6, 35), vor catvāriṁśat u. s. w. aber auch aṣṭa (P. 6, 3, 49).

aṣṭādaśan «achtzehn» ŚAT. BR. 8, 4, 1, 8. 27. 28. KĀTY. ŚR. 8, 6, 4. 24,

3, 36. M. 8, 3. 7. 9, 250. ŚRUT. 4. aṣṭādaśa «der achtzehnte» und

«achtzehntheilig» VS. 14, 23. ŚAT. BR. 8, 4, 1, 28. aṣṭādaśadhā

SĀṁKHYAK. 48. aṣṭāviṁśati 28 VS. 18, 25. ŚAT. BR. 10, 2, 3, 11. TAITT.

UP. 2, 10. YĀJÑ. 1, 302. aṣṭāviṁśa «der 28ste» und «28fach» AV. 19, 8, 2.

aṣṭātriṁśa «der 38ste» und «38 enthaltend» ŚAT. BR. 10, 4, 3, 18.

aṣṭācatvāriṁśat 6, 2, 2, 32. 33. 9, 3, 3, 19. aṣṭācatvāriṁśa «der 48ste»

und «48fach» VS. 14, 23. ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 3, 5. 13, 5, 4, 10. aṣṭacatvāriṁśat

P. 6, 3, 49. aṣṭācatvāriṁśin oder aṣṭācatvāriṁśaka «der ein 40jähriges

Gelübde gethan hat» 5, 1, 94, Vārtt. 4. aṣṭāpañcāśat ŚAT. BR. 6, 2, 2, 31.

36. aṣṭāṣaṣṭi ṚV. PRĀT. 16, 54. aṣṭaṣaṣṭi Verz. d. B. H. 146 (69).

aṣṭāsaptati ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 4, 11. Vor śata u. s. w. soll nach P. 6, 3, 47,

Vārtt. die Länge nicht zulässig sein; wir finden aber aṣṭāśataṁ śatāni

«108 Hunderte (10800») ŚAT. BR. 10, 4, 2, 23. 24. Die Kürze haben wir

MBH. 3, 158: nāmāṣṭaśatakam «die 108 Namen.» In der Regel ist eine

solche Verbindung von Einern mit śata und sahasra als Multiplication und

nicht als Addition aufzufassen: aṣṭaśatam «800» YĀJÑ. 1, 302.

aṣṭasāhasrikā adj. f. «aus 8000» («Artikeln») «bestehend»: prajñāpāramitā

BURN. Intr. 51. In Zusammensetzungen mit andern Wörtern kommen im

Veda Kürze und Länge vor, in der klass. Sprache bei einfach

aufzulösenden compp. nur die Kürze P. 6, 3, 125. 126. aṣṭaputra adj. AV.

8, 9, 21. aṣṭayoni ebend. aṣṭavṛṣa 5, 16, 8. aṣṭastana ŚAT. BR. 6, 5, 2,

19. KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 4, 3. aṣṭavarga «in Reihen von Achten bestehend» 9, 4,

19. aṣṭagṛhīta 8, 2, 26. 16, 2, 7. aṣṭavarṣā «achtjährig» M. 9, 94.

aṣṭavikalpa SĀṁKHYAK. 53. aṣṭākapāla «aus acht Schalen bestehend» VS.

29, 60. AIT. BR. 1, 1. ŚAT. BR. 1, 6, 2, 5. 2, 2, 1, 27. 5, 1, 8. 4, 3. MBH. 3,

14200. fgg. aṣṭākapāla in der Verbindung mit havis, sonst aṣṭakapāla P. 6,

3, 46, Vārtt. 2. aṣṭāpakṣa AV. 9, 3, 21. aṣṭācakra 10, 2, 31. 11, 4, 22.

aṣṭābandhura ṚV. 10, 53, 7. aṣṭāśapha ŚAT. BR. 6, 2, 2, 15. aṣṭāgava

«mit acht Kühen bespannt» P. 6, 3, 46, Vārtt. 3. aber aṣṭagavam «acht

Kühe» ebend. aṣṭāhiraṇyā dakṣiṇā ved. P. 6, 3, 126, Sch. — Man könnte

vielleicht mit demselben Recht aṣṭa als Thema aufstellen (die künstlichen

Formen priyāṣṭnā u. s. w. SIDDH.K.22, «a» dürfen nicht in Betracht

kommen), da der nom. acc. aṣṭa auch als Schwächung von aṣṭā = aṣṭau

(eine Dual-Form) betrachtet werden kann. aṣṭa oder aṣṭan muss auf eine

Wurzel aś zurückgeführt werden, da nur aus dieser die Form aśīti zu

erklären ist.

aṣṭan Sp. 531, Z. 16 lies In den späteren Büchern st. In der Regel und

vgl. Ind. St. 9, 469. Z. 26 lies 2, 2, 1, 17 st. 2, 2, 1, 27.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

aṣṭan aṣṭan, i. e. aś + tan (cf. aśīti; the vb. is doubtful), card. num., adj.

Eight, Hiḍ. 2, 9.

— Comp. tri-, Twentyfour, Man. 9, 94.

— Cf. [greek] = aṣṭau; Lat. octo; Goth. ahtau: A.S. ehta.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

aṣṭan a. eight.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

aṣṭan ash-ṭan, nr. eight: nm. -ṭau, -ṭā, or-ṭa.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

aṣṭan tri° ba° va° aśa—vyāptau kanin tuṭ ca . (āṭa) 1 saṁkhyābhede

dvyekayordvivacanaikavacane pā° nirdeśena saṁkhyāvācakamātrasya

saṁkhyāparatvanirṇayāt . 2 tatsaṁkhyānvite ca . aṣṭau tānyavrataghnāni

āpomūlaṁ phalaṁ payaḥ . havirbrāhmaṇakāmyā ca

gurorvacanamauṣadham skṛtiḥ nindyāsvaṣṭāsu cānyāsu striyorātriṣu

varjayet manuḥ aṣṭānāṁ lokapālānāṁ vapurdhārayate nṛpaḥ . aṣṭāvimān

samāsena strīvivāhān nibodhata iti ca manuḥ . daśaviṁśatiśabdayoḥ

parataḥ samāse ādantādeśa aṣṭādaśaḥ . aṣṭāviṁśatiḥ triṁśadādau vā

aṣṭatriṁśat aṣṭātriṁśat aṣṭa(ṣṭā) catvāriṁśat aṣṭa(ṣṭā) pañcāśat aṣṭa

(ṣṭā)ṣaṣṭhiḥ aṣṭa(ṣṭā)saptatiḥ aṣṭāśītiḥ aṣṭa(ṣṭā)navatiḥ

saṁkhyāvyayapūrbakāt tataḥ bahuvrīhau ḍac . niraṣṭe aśvaśate śata°

brā° saptāṣṭāni ahāni .

अहि — ahi Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ahi m. ( «aṁh»), a snake &c.

m. the serpent of the sky, the demon Vṛitra

ahi m. (see also «ahirbudhnyas» below)

m. a cloud

m. water

m. the sun

m. a N. of Rāhu

m. a traveller

m. the navel

m. lead

ahi m. (in arithm.) the number eight

m. N. of a ṛiṣi (with the patron. «auśanasa») and of another (with the

patron. «paidva»). ([Zd. ‘azi’; Lat. ‘angui-s’; Gk. [greek]; Lith. ungury-s;

Russ. [russian]; Armen. oz; Germ. unc.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

ahi a. Killing; pervaded, pervading. —hiḥ [āhaṁti, ā-hana-iṇa sa ca ḍit āṅo

thasvaśca Uṇ. 4. 137]

(1) A serpent, snake; ahayaḥ saviṣāḥ sarve nirviṣā ḍuṁḍumāḥ smṛtāḥ

Ks. 14. 84.

(2) The sun.

(3) The planet Rāhu.

(4) A traveller.

(5) The demon Vṛtra.

(6) A wicked man.

(7) A cheat, rogue.

(8) The Aśleṣā Nakshatra.

(9) Water. (10) Earth.

(11) A milch cow.

(12) Lead.

(13) The navel.

(14) A cloud. —hī (du.) Heaven and earth. [cf., L. anguis, Gr. ehis].

— Comp.

—arṣu a. gliding away like a snake, not facing the enemy.

—kāṁtaḥ air, wind.

—koṣaḥ the slough of a snake.

—kṣatraḥ, —kṣetraḥ N. of a country in the east.

—gopa a. Ved. guarded by a serpent.

—ghnaṁ the slaying of the serpent or demon Vṛtra.

—ghnī m. killing snakes.

—chatraḥ 1. N. of a country, conquered by Arjuna and given to

Droṇa. —2. a kind of vegetable poison. (

—trā) 1. sugar. —2. the plant meṣaśṛṁgī. —3. N. of the city

ahicchatra. —chatrakaṁ a mushroom.

—jit m. 1. N. of Kṛṣṇa (the slayer of the serpent Kāliyā). —2. N. of

Indra.

—jihvā N. of a plant (nāgajihvālatā). —tuṁḍikaḥ [ahestuṁḍaṁ

mukhaṁ tena dīvyati ṭhan, ṭhañ vā] a snake-catcher, conjurer, juggler.

—dviṣ, —druh, —māra, —ripu, —vidviṣ m. 1. N. of Garuḍa. —2. an

ichneumon. —3. a peacock. —4. Indra. —5. Kṛṣṇa; Ki. 4. 27; Śi. 1. 41.

—nakulaṁ snakes and ichneumons.

—nakulikā [ahinakulayorvairam vun P. II. 4. 9] the natural

antipathy between a serpent and an ichneumon.

—nāmabhṛt m. N. of Baladeva.

—nirmokaḥ, —nivlayanī the slough of a snake.

—patākaḥ a kind of snake (not venomous).

—patiḥ 1. ‘the lord of snakes’, Vāsuki. —2. any large serpent.

—putrakaḥ a kind of boat (serpent-shaped).

—pūtanaṁ, —nā a kind of disease.

—phenaḥ —naṁ ‘the saliva or venom of a snake’, opium.

—bu (vu) dhnaḥ, —vradhnaḥ, ahirbudhnaḥ —dhnyaḥ 1. one of the

Rudras. —2. Śiva. —3. Uttarabhadrapada Nakshatra. —4. a name of a

Muhūrta. -devatā the twenty-sixth lunar mansion.

—bhayaṁ 1. the fear of a lurking snake. —2. apprehension of

treachery, danger arising from one’s own allies; -dā [ahiṁ bhayaṁ dyati

khaṁḍayati do ka] N. of the plant bhūmyāmalakī. —bhānu a. Ved. 1.

shining like serpents. —2. causing the motion of the sun (sūryagatihetu)

as the wind; an epithet of the Maruts.

—bhuj m. 1. N. of Garuḍa. —2. a peacock. —3. ichneumon. —4. N. of

a plant.

—bhṛt m. Śiva.

—manyu a. 1. having destructive anger or with unimpaired

knowledge. —2. enraged like serpents; epithet of the Maruts. (

—nyuḥ) the anger of a serpent.

—mardanī N. of a plant (gaṁdhanākulī). —māya a. having

multiform or versatile forms like a snake, showing a variety of colour and

shape, such as Vṛtra.

—mārakaḥ, —medakaḥ 1. N. of a plant (arimeda). —2. = -dviṣ q. v.

—latā 1. the betel-nut plant. —2. N. of a plant (gaṁdhanākulī. —

śuṣma a. having all-pervading strength; -satvan Ved. one whose men hiss

like serpents.

—saktha a. having a long thigh like a serpent. (

—kthaḥ) N. of a country.

—hatyaṁ Ved. the slaying of the serpent or demon Vṛtra.

—han a. killing serpents or Vṛtra, Garuḍa, Indra.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ahi m. Uṇ. 4, 139 (ahi, vgl. P. 6, 2, 48, Sch.). 1) «Schlange, Natter», greek

AK. 1, 2, 1, 7. 3, 4, 3, 24. H. 1302. an. 2, 596. MED. h. 2. HĀR. 15. f. ahi

oder ahī (s. d.) gaṇa vahvādi zu P. 4, 1, 45. ahirna jūrṇāmati sarpati

tvacam ṚV. 9, 86, 44. 7, 104, 9. VS. 6, 12. AV. 4, 3, 4. 6, 12, 1. 56, 1. 67,

2. 6, 139, 5. ŚAT. BR. 2, 3, 1, 6. 5, 2, 47. 4, 4, 5, 23. M. 2, 79. 3, 9. 11,

68. 228. 240. 12, 57. HIT. Pr. 27. I, 158. ŚĀK. 183. ahayaḥ saviṣāḥ sarve

nirviṣā duṇḍubhāḥ KATHĀS. 14, 84. ahijihmatā R. 2, 43, 2. ahinakulam

«die Schlange und das Ichneumon» P. 2, 4, 9, Sch. — «die Schlange am

Himmel, der Dämon» Vṛtra (deshalb NAIGH. 1, 10 durch «Wolke», 22

durch «Wasser» erklärt) AK. 3, 4, 240. TRIK. 2, 8, 22. H. an. MED.

ahannenaṁ prathamajāmahīnām ṚV. 1, 32, 3. 5. vṛtraṁ yadindra

śavasāvadhīrahim 51, 4. 52, 10. 80, 1. 103, 2. 7. 187, 6. ahimapaḥ

pariṣṭhāṁ hatho vṛtram 6, 72, 3. Ueber ahirbudhnyaḥ s. u. budhnya. — 2)

«Nabel» (udarāvarta) HĀR. 263. — 3) «Reisender.» — 4) «Sonne.» — 5)

Rāhu ANEKĀRTHADHV. im ŚKDR. — 6) vapra H. an. «Blei» WILS.

ahi 7) N. pr. eines Ṛṣi Ind. St.3,204,b. auśanasa 460, 1. aheḥ paidvasya

sāma 204,b. — Vgl. mahāhi.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

ahi ahi, i. e. probably *aṁh + i (cf. aṁhas), A snake, Kir. 5, 47.

— Comp. andha-, m. a kind of snake.

— Cf. [greek] Lat. anguis; probably also [greek]

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

ahi m. serpent, esp. the demon Vṛtra.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

ahi ah-i, m. serpent; dragon, Vṛtra.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

ahi pu° āhanti ā + hana + ḍin ṭilopaḥ āṅo hrasvaśca . 1 sarpe,

lokaprasiddhasarpabhedādi suśrute darśitam . aśītistveva sarpāṇāṁ

bhidyate pañjadhā tu sā . darvīkarā maṇḍalino rājimantastayaiva ca .

nirviṣā vaikarañjāśca trividhāste punaḥ smṛtāḥ .. darvīkarā maṇḍalino

rājimantaśca pannagāḥ . teṣu darvīkarā jñeyā viṁśatiḥ ṣaṭcapannagāḥ .

dvāviṁśatirmaṇḍalino rājimantastathā daśa . nirviṣā dvādaśa jñeyā

vaikarañjāstrayastathā . vaikarañjodbhavāḥ sapta citrāmaṇḍalirājilāḥ .

padābhimṛṣṭā duṣṭā vā kruddhā grāsārthino’pi vā . te daśanti

mahākrodhāstaddhi trividhamucyate . sarpitaṁ raditaṁ vāpi tṛtīyamatha

nirviṣam . sarpāṅgābhihataṁ kecidicchanti khalu tadvidaḥ . padāni yatra

dantānāmekaṁ dve vā bahūni ca .. nimagnānyalparaktāni yānyuddhṛtya

karoti hi . cañcumālakayuktāni vaikṛtyakaraṇāni ca . saṅkṣiptāni

saśophāni vidyāttat sarpitaṁ bhiṣak . rājyaḥ salohitā yatra nīlāḥ pītāḥ

sitāstathā . vijñeyaṁ raditaṁ tattu jñeyamalpaviṣañca tat .

aśophamalpaduṣṭāsṛk prakṛtisthasya dehinaḥ . padaṁ padāni vā

vidyādaviṣaṁ taccikitsakaḥ . sarpaspṛṣṭasya bhīrorhibhayena kupito’nilaḥ

. kasyacid kurute śophaṁ sarpāṅgābhihatantu tat . vyādhitodvignadaṣṭāni

jñeyānyalpaviṣāṇi tu . tathātivṛddhabālātidaṣṭamalpaviṣaṁ smṛtam .

suparṇadevabrahmarṣiyakṣasiddhaniṣevite .. viṣaghnauṣadhiyukte ca

deśe na kramate viṣam . rathāṅgalāṅgalacchatrasvastikāṅkuśadhāriṇaḥ ..

jñeyādarvīkarāḥ sarpāḥ phaṇinaḥ śīghragāminaḥ .

maṇḍalairvividhaiścitrāḥ pṛthavo mandagāminaḥ .. jñeyā maṇḍalinaḥ

sarpā jvalanārkasamaprabhāḥ . snigdhā vividhavarṇāmistiyyugūrdhvantu

rājibhiḥ .. citritā iva ye bhānti rājimantastu te smṛtāḥ . muktārūpyaprabhā

ye ca kapilā ye ca pannagāḥ .. sugandhinaḥ savarṇābhāste jātyā

brāhmaṇāḥ smṛtāḥ . kṣatriyāḥ snigdhavarṇāstu pannagā bhṛśakopanāḥ ..

sūryacandrākṛti cchatnaṁ lakṣma teṣāṁ tathāmbujam . kṛṣṇā vajranibhā

ye ca lohitā varṇatastathā . dhūmrāḥ pārāvatābhāśca vaiśyāste pannagāḥ

smṛtāḥ .. mahiṣadvīpivarṇābhāstathaiva paruṣatvacaḥ . bhinnavarṇāśca

ye kecicchūdrāste parikīrtitāḥ .. kopayantyanilaṁ jantoḥ phaṇinaḥ sarva

eva tu . pittaṁ maṇḍalinaścāpi kaphañcānekarājayaḥ ..

apatyasamavarṇābhyāṁ dvidoṣakaralakṣaṇam . jñeyau doṣaiśca

dampatyorviśeṣaścātra vakṣyate .. rajanyāḥ paścime yāme

sarpāścitrāścaranti hi . śeṣeṣūktā maṇḍalino divā darvīkarāḥ smṛtāḥ ..

darvīkarāstu taruṇā vṛddhā maṇḍalinastathā . rājimanto vayomadhye

jāyante mṛtyuhetavaḥ .. nakulākulitā bālā vāriviprahatāḥ kṛśāḥ . vṛddhā

muktatvaco bhītāḥ sarpāstvalpaviṣāḥ smṛtāḥ . tatra darvīkarāḥ .

kṛṣṇasarpo hāhākṛṣṇaḥ kṛṣṇodaraḥ śvetakapoto mahākapoto valāhako

mahāsarpaḥ śaṅkhapālo lohitākṣo gavedhukaḥ parisarpaḥ khaṇḍaphaṇaḥ

kakudapadmo mahāpadmo darbhapuṣpo dadhimukhaḥ puṇḍarīko

bhrukuṭīmukho viṣkiraḥ puṣpābhikīrṇo girisarpa ṛjusarpaḥ śvetodaro

mahāśirā alagardo āśīviṣa iti .. maṇḍalinastu . ādarśamaṇḍalaḥ

śvetamaṇḍalo raktamaṇḍalaścitramaṇḍalaḥ pṛṣato rodhrapuṣpo milindako

gonaso vṛddhagonasaḥ panaso mahāpanaso veṇupatrakaḥ śiśuko

madanaḥ pāliṁhiraḥ piṅgalastantukaḥ puṣpapāṇḍuḥ ṣaḍago’gnikī babhnuḥ

kaṣāyaḥ kaluṣaḥ pārāvato hastābharaṇaścitraka eṇīpada iti ..

rājimantastu . puṇḍarīko rājicitro’ṅgularājirvindurājiḥ

kardamakastṛṇaśoṣakaḥ sarṣapakaḥ śvetahanurdarbhapuṣpaścakrako

godhūmakaḥ kikkisāda iti .. nirviṣāstu . galagolī śūkapatro’jagaro divyako

varṣāhikaḥ puṣpaśakalī jyotīrathaḥ kṣīrikāpuṣpako’ndhā

hiko’hipatākogaurāhiko vṛkṣeśaya iti . vaikarañjāstu trayāṇāṁ

darvīkarādīnāṁ vyatikarājjātāḥ . tadyathā . mākuliḥ poṭagalaḥ

snigdharājiriti . tatra kṛṣṇasarpeṇa gonasyāṁ vaiparītyena vā jāto

mākuliḥ . rājilena gonasyāṁ vaiparītyena vā jātaḥ poṭagalaḥ .

kṛṣṇasarpeṇa rājimatyāṁ vaiparītyena vā jātaḥ snigdharājiriti .

teṣāmādyasya pitṛvadviṣotkarṣo dvayormātṛvadityeke . trayāṇāṁ

vaikarañjānāṁ punardivyelakarodhrapuṣpakarājicitrakāḥ poṭagalaḥ

puṣpābhikīrṇo darbhapuṣpo vellitakaḥ sapta teṣāmādyāstrayo rājilavat

śeṣā maṇḍalivat . evameteṣāṁ sarpāṇāmaśītiriti . tatra

mahānetrajihvāsyaśirasaḥ pumāṁsaḥ, sūkṣmanetrajihvāsyaśirasaḥ

striyaḥ . ubhayalakṣaṇāmandaviṣā akrodhā napuṁsakā iti . teṣāṁ bahūni

purāṇe nāmānyuktāni teṣāṁ pradhānyato bhārate katiciduktāni

bahutvānnāmadheyāni pannagānāṁ tapodhana! . na kīrtayiṣye sarveṣāṁ

prāghānyena tu me śṛṇu . śeṣaḥ prathamato jāto vāsukistadanantaram .

airāvatastakṣakaśca karkīṭakadhanañjayau . kāliyo maṇināgaśca

nāgaścāpūraṇastathā . nāgastathā piñjaraka elāpatro’tha vāmanaḥ .

nīlānīlau tathā nāgau kalmāṣaśavalau tathā . āryakaścograkaścaiva nāgaḥ

kalaśapotakaḥ . surāmukho dadhimukhastathā vimalapiṇḍakaḥ . āptaḥ

karoṭakaścaiva śaṅkho vāliśikhastathā . niṣṇānako hemaguho nahuṣaḥ

piṅgalastathā . bāhyakarṇo hastipadastathā mudgarapiṇḍakaḥ .

kambalāśvatarau cāpi nāgaḥ kālīyakastathā vṛttasaṁvartakau nāgau dvau

ca padmāviti śrutau . nāgaḥ śaṅkhamukhaścaiva tathā kuṣmāṇḍako’paraḥ

. kṣemakaśca tathā nāgo nāgaḥ piṇḍārakastathā . karavīraḥ

puṣpadaṁṣṭro vilvako vilvapāṇḍaraḥ . mūṣakādaḥ śaṅkhaśirāḥ

pūrṇabhadro haridrakaḥ . aparājito jyotikaśca pannagaḥ śrīvahastathā .

kauravyo dhṛtarāṣṭraśca śaṅkhapiṇḍaśca vīryavān . virajāśca subāhuśca

śālipiṇḍaśca vīryavān . hastipiṇḍaḥ piṭharakaḥ sumukhaḥ kauṇapāśanaḥ .

kuṭharaḥ kuñjaraścaiva tathā nāgaḥ pramākaraḥ . kumudaḥ kusudākṣaśca

tittirirhalikastathā . kardamaśca mahānāgo nāgaśca bahumūlakaḥ .

karkarākarkarau nāgau kuṇḍodaramahodarau . ete prādhānyato nāgāḥ

kīrtitā dvijasattama! . bahutvānnāmadheyānāmitare nānukīrtitāḥ . eteṣāṁ

prasavo yaśca prasavasya ca santatiḥ . asaṁkhyeyeti matyā tānna

vravīmi tapodhana! . bahūnīha sahasāṇi prayutānyarvudāni . ca .

aśakyānyeva saṁkhyātuṁ pannagānāṁ tapodhana! bhā° ā° 35 a° .

ahiparikarabhājo bhāsmanairaṅgarāgaiḥ māghaḥ .

mahato’pyenasomāsāttvacevāhirvimucyate na pakṣyahipreṣyanāmnīṁ na

ca bhīṣaṇanāmikām lūtāhi śaraṭānāñca tiraścāṁ cāmbucāriṇamiti ca

manuḥ . 3 sūrye, in 4 rāhau, 5 pathike, aha—vyāptau in . 6 vṛtrāsure tasya

sarvalokavyāpakatvāttannāmakatvam sa ca viśvarūpapitustvaṣṭuḥputraḥ

tadutpattikathā bhāga° 6 ska° 9 a° hataputrastatastvaṣṭā juhāvendrāya

śatrave . indraśatro! vibardhvasva mā ciraṁ jahi vidviṣam .

athānvāhāryacanādutthito ghoradarśanaḥ . kṛtānta iva lokānāṁ

yugāntasamaye yathā . viṣvagvivardhabhānaṁ tamiṣumānaṁ dinedine .

dagdhaśaila pratīkāśaṁ sandhyābhrānīkavarcasam ..

taptatāmraśikhāśmaśruṁ madhyāhnārkogralocanam . dedīpyamāne

triśikhe śūla āropya rodasī .. atyantamunnayantañca cālayantaṁ padā

mahīm . darīgambhīravaktreṇa pivatā ca nabhastalam .. lihatā

jihvayarkṣāṇi grasatā bhuvanatrayam . mahatā raudradaṁṣṭreṇa

jṛmbhamāṇaṁ muhurmūhuḥ . vitrastādudruvurlokāvīkṣya sarve diśodiśa ..

yenāvṛtāime lokāstapasā tvāṣṭramūrtinā . sarvevṛtra iti proktaḥ pāpaḥ

paramadāruṇaḥ .. 7 khale, 8 vañcake, 9 sarpasvāmike aśleṣānakṣatre ca .

mṛdugaṇastīkṣṇo’hi rudrendrayuk jyo° . drutaṁ

dhanuḥkhaṇḍamivāhidviviṣaḥ kirā° . adviṣastadbhavatā niśamyatām

māghaḥ . 10 āhantari tri° ahirasi budhnyaḥ tāṇḍya° .

ahirāhantāriprabhṛtīnām mā° . aha—vyāptau in . 11 jale

mahīvyāpitvāttattvam 12 vyāpake 13 vyāpte ca tri° . 14 dyāvāpṛthivyoḥ

dvi° va° 15 pṛthivyāṁ 1 6 strīgavyāñca strī vā ṅīp nāganāmatvāt

tajjātatvācca 17 sīse dhātau . tasyotpattyādikam bhāvapra° dṛṣṭvā

bhogisutāṁ ramyāṁ vāsukistu vyamocayat vīryaṁ jātastato nāgaḥ

sarvarogāpahonṛṇām sīsaṁ badhnaṁ tathā vapraṁyogeṣṭaṁ

nāganāmakam (nāgobhujaśaḥ) sīsaṁ raṅgaguṇaṁ jñeyaṁ

viśeṣānmehanāśanam . nāgastu nāgaśatatulyabalaṁ dadāti vyādhiṁ

vināśayati jīvanamātanoti . vahniṁ pradīpayati kāmabalaṁ karoti mṛtyuṁ

ca nāśayati santatasevitaḥ saḥ . pākena hīnau kila vaṅganāgau kuṣṭhāni

guṇmāṁśca tathātikaṣṭam . pāṇḍupramehānilamādaśothabhagandarādīn

kurutaḥ prabhuktau tasya pākavidhimāha tatraiva . tāmbūlarasa

saṁpiṣṭaśilālepāt punaḥ punaḥ . dvātriṁśadbhiḥ puṭairnāgo nirūpyaṁ

bhasma jāyate . (śilā manaḥśilā) anyacca . aśvatthaciñcātvakcūrṇaṁ

caturthāśena nikṣipet . tatpātre vidruto nāgo lohadarvyā pracālitaḥ .

yāmaikena bhavedbhasma tattulyā syānmanaḥśilā . kāñjikena dvayaṁ

ghṛṣṭvā pacet dṛḍhapuṭena tam . svāṅgaśītaṁ punaḥ piṣṭvā śilayā

kāñjikena ca . punaḥ pacet sametābhyāmevaṁ ṣaṣṭipuṭairmṛtiḥ .

इभ — ibha Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ibha m. (? «i» servants, dependants, domestics, household, family ([])

m. fearless ([])

m. an elephant &c.

m. the number eight

m. N. of a plant

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ibha «Gesinde, Hörige, Dienerschaft; Hauswesen, familia» NIR. 6, 12.

kṛṇuṣva pājaḥ prasitiṁ na pṛthvīṁ yāhi rājevāmavāṁ ibhena ṚV. 4, 4, 1.

kastokāya ka ibhāyota rāye ‘dhi bravattanve3 ko janāya «wer legt Fürbitte

ein für Kind, für Haus und Habe, wer für sich und seine Leute?» 1, 84, 17.

ā tugraṁ śaśvadibhaṁ dyotanāya māturna sīmupa sṛjā iyadhyai 6, 20, 8;

vgl. übrigens u. smadibha. Als adj. müsste das Wort gefasst werden in

der Bedeutung «umgeben von Hörigen (Hofstaat») in der Stelle: sa

marmṛjāna āyubhiribho rājeva suvrataḥ. śyeno na vaṁsu ṣīdati 9, 57, 3.

Deshalb drängt sich die Vermuthung auf, dass hier der ursprüngliche

Ausdruck entstellt und etwa herzustellen wäre: ibhe rājeva suvrate «wie

ein Fürst unter seiner ergebenen Dienerschaft», wodurch auch suvrata

erst zu seiner rechten Bedeutung käme. Ob ibha m. Uṇ. 3, 151 hierher

oder zu 2. ibha gehört, lässt sich nicht entscheiden. — Vgl. ibhya.

ibha m. «Elephant» NIR. 6, 12. AK. 2, 8, 2, 3. H. 1218. M. 8, 34. 11, 68.

12, 67. BHARTṚ. 1, 5. 58. am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā AK. 2, 8, 2, 48.

H. 748. ibhī «ein Elephantenweibchen» AK. 3, 4, 55. TRIK. 3, 3, 75. — Vgl.

ibhyā.

ibha Spr. 2620. — Vgl. gandhebha, digibha.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

ibha ibha, m. An elephant, Rājat. 5, 315.

— Comp. gandha-, m. a kind of elephant, Rājat. 1, 300. jala-gandha-, m. a

kind of elephant, or a gandhebha (see the preceding) living in water,

Rājat. 5, 107. digibha, i. e. diś-, m. an elephant of a quarter or point of

the compass, one of eight attached to the north, north-east, etc.,

supporting the globe, Bhāg. P. 5, 14, 39.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

ibha m. n. household, family; m. elephant.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

ibha ibha, m. n. domestics, household, family; m. elephant.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

ibha pu° iṇ—bha kicca . 1 hastini, vanyebhadānāvilagandhadurdharāḥ

māghaḥ 2 tatsaṁkhyātulyasaṁkhyāke aṣṭalaṁkhyānvite ca . gajāhi

aṣṭasu dikṣu khyitā airāvatādayo’ṣṭau vartante iti teṣāmaṣṭatvam . te ca

airāvataḥ puṇḍarīkaḥ vāmanaḥ kumudo’ñjanaḥ . puṣpavantaḥ

sārvabhaumaḥ supratīkaśca diggajāḥ amaroktakrameṇa

pūrvādīśānāntadikṣu sthitāḥ . asya ca uttarapadasthatve

śreṣṭhārthadyotakatā vyāghrāderākṛti gaṇatvāt upamitasamāsaḥ .

striyāṁ ṅīp . jātitvāt poṭāśabdena samāse’sya pūrbanipātaḥ

puṁvadbhāvaśca ibhaporā

ibhalakṣaṇavibhāgādi vṛha° saṁ° madhvābhadantāḥ suvibhaktadehā

na copadigdhāśca kṛśāḥ kṣamāśca . gātraiḥ sameścāpasamānavaṁśā

varāhatulyairjaghanaiśca bhadrāḥ .. vakṣo’tha kakṣāvalayaḥ ślathāśca

lambodaraṁ tvagvṛhatī galaśca . sthūlā ca kukṣiḥ saha pecakena saiṁhī

ca dṛṅmandamataṅgajasya .. mṛgāstu

hrasvādharavālameḍhrāstanvaṅighrakaṇṭhadvijahastakarṇāḥ .

sthūlekṣaṇāśceti yathoktacihnaiḥ saṅkīrṇanāgā vyatimiśra cihnāḥ ..

pañconnatiḥ sapta mṛgasya dairghyamaṣṭau ca hastāḥ pariṇāhamānam .

ekadvivṛddhāvatha mandabhadrau saṅkīrṇanāgo ‘niyatapramāṇaḥ ..

bhadrasya varṇo harito madasya mandasya hāridrakasannikāśaḥ . kṛṣṇo

madaścābhihito mṛgasya saṅkīrṇanāgasya mado vimiśraḥ ..

tāmrauṣṭhatāluvadanāḥ kalaviṅkanetrāḥ snigdhonnatāgradaśanāḥ

pṛthulāyatāsyāḥ .

cāponnatāyatanigūḍhanimagnavaṁśāstanvekaromacitakūrmasamānakum

bhāḥ . vistīrṇakarṇahanunābhilalāṭaguhyāḥ

kūrmonnatairdvinavaviṁśatibhirnakhaiśca . rekhātrayopacitavṛttakarāḥ

subālāḥ dhanyāḥ sugandhimadapuṣkaramārutāśca .

doghoṅguliraktapuṣkarāḥ sajalāmbhodaninādavṛṁhiṇaḥ .

vṛhadāyatavṛttakandharā dhanyā bhūmipatermataṅgajāḥ .

nirmadābhyadhikahīnanakhāṅgān kubjavāmanakameṣaviṣāṇān .

dṛśyakośaphalapuṣkarahīnān śyāvanīla śavalāsitatālūn .

svalpavaktraruhamatkuṇaṣaṇḍhān hastinīṁ ca gajalakṣaṇayuktām .

garbhiṇīṁ ca nṛpatiḥ paradeśaṁ prāpayedativirūpaphalāste .

hemā° ṣari° kha° lakṣaṇasamuccaye viṣṇudha° . nāgāḥ praśastā

dharmajña! pramāṇādadhikāśca ye . dīrghahastā

mahocchrāyā’vāmanāśca viśeṣataḥ . nigūḍhavaṁśāmadhvakṣā vyūḍhā

vyūḍhocca mastākāḥ (vyūḍhā vipulāḥ) viṁśatyaṣṭādaśanakhāḥ .

śītakālamadāśca ye . te praśastāmahānāgāḥ ye tathā saptasūcchritāḥ .

dantacchadeṣu dṛśyeta yeṣāṁ svastikalakṣaṇam . bhṛṅgārabālavyajanā

vardhamānāṅkuśāstathā . dhāryā naite tathā dhāryā vāmanā ye ca

matkuṇāḥ . hastinyoyāśca garbhiṇyoye ca bhūḍhā mata ṅgajāḥ .

apākalāśca kubjāśca saddantāeva bhārgava! . kudantāśca tathā varjyā

vāmakūṭāśca yatnataḥ . aśrusmṛśaśca kūṭāśca ye ṣaṇḍhā vikaṭāśca ye .

rāma uvākṣa vāmanādyāśca ye nāgāḥ proktāninditanakṣaṇāḥ . teṣāṁ tu

śrotumicchāmi lakṣaṇaṁ varuṇātmaja! . puṣkara uvāca .

ānāhāyāmasaṁpūrṇoyo’dhihrasvo bhavedgajaḥ . vāmanaḥ sa

samākhyātomatkuṇodantavarjitaḥ . (ānāhaḥsthūlatā) (āyāmo derghyam)

daśāṁ caturthī saṁprāpya vardhete yasya na dvijau . sthūṇāghanāyatau

syātāṁ sa mūḍho hi gajo’dhamaḥ . apākalo viśālena dantenaikena

vāraṇaḥ . saṁkṣiptavakṣoja ghanaḥ pṛṣṭhamadhyasamunnataḥ .

pramāṇahīnanābhiśca sa kubjovāraṇādhamaḥ . anunnatābhyāṁ

saddantaḥ kudantaḥsyāttato bahiḥ . (bahirdantasīmani) .

vāmadantonnato nāgo vāmakūṭaśca kathyate . dantāvaśruspṛśau yasya

so’śruspṛgiti kortitaḥ . ekadantastathā nāgaḥ kūṭa ityabhidhīyate .

pādayoḥ sannikarṣaḥ syāt yasya nāgasya gacchataḥ . sa ṣaṇḍo’dhvani

yudve ca lakṣaṇa jñairna pūjitaḥ . aratnyabhyadhikaṁ yasya

vistareṇastanāntaram . vikaṭaḥ savinirdiṣṭo durgatirninditogajaḥ . rāma

uvāca . śrotumicchāmyaham deva! kuñjaraṁsaptasūcchritam . yaṁ

prāpya kila rājānojayanti varsurdhā nṛpāḥ . puṣkara uvāca . varcaḥ

satvambalaṁ rūpaṅkāntiḥsahananañjavaḥ . saptaitāni sadā yasya sa

gajaḥ saptasūcchritaḥ . ye

vāmavaddakṣiṇapārśvabhāgenāplātukāmāḥpiṭakotthayāpi . te nāgasukhyā

vijayāya yuddhe bhavanti rājñāṁ na hi saṁśayo’tra tatraiva

parāśarasaṁhitā . hastināṁ

jātideśavarṇākṛtipramāṇaceṣṭādilakṣaṇamanuvyākhyāsyāmaḥ . tatra

jātayaścatasro mavanti . bhadrā mandā mṛgā miśrāśceti

tatparijñānamākṛticeṣṭādibhirupadiśyate . tatra bhadra

jātiścārudṛṣṭyāyatamukhovyūḍhoccamastakaḥ udagrasatvo’nuvṛttakaraḥ

śrotā dorghapuṣkarāṅgulibāladhiḥ mahāmanyoromaśagrīvaḥ .

sthūlameḍhrodaratāmratālujihvauṣṭhaḥ supārśvaḥ snigdhaḥ

savarṇamṛduromā kūrmapādaḥ stadhvasthitiścitāṁsaḥ pṛthvāsanaḥ

sūkṣmavinducitrobahvanuromopacitaśrotraḥsunakho dhanuḥpṛṣṭhavaṁśo

madhuvarṇatāluryūthābhirakṣitā sahiṣṇuranvarthavedī balavān

kāmāturovṛkṣāvamardī mṛdunopāyena sādhya āśūpade śagrāhī ca bhavati

. (udagro uccaḥ anuvṛttakaraḥ anukrameṇa vṛttakaraḥ puṣkaraḥ karāgraṁ

manyā dhamanī anvarthavedī agre vakṣyate) . mandajātiḥ

saṁketābhijñaḥ suhrasvo mahodarakaraśrotāḥ

sthūladantastatapṛṣṭavaṁśaḥ sthūlahastajihvāṁsagrīvaḥ,

pṛthuhastamastakaḥ suvibhaktoraḥśirāḥsumṛduvṛttaśrotraḥ

sthūlāsthikarakavāpīvilapādaḥ sūkṣmanābhistanutāmratvakkarṇakaṭaḥ

dīrghoccameḍhrāṅgulirbālabāladhirmuṣkarandhrakakṣavaraṇopadigdhohar

yakṣaḥ subaddhajaghanaḥ savṛttoraktogambhīravedī mandajātiḥ

jātaśaṅkodṛḍhamanmathastīkṣṇasādhyoyūthānugābhī grahaṇagatopi

nāribhayamāviśati . (gambhīravedī vakṣyate upadigdho liptaḥ)

mṛgajātīyaḥ

punarhrasvapuṣkaroccahanuhastabāhyamehanasudantanakhapṛthuvaṁśa

gnīvāsyodarameḍhratanurviśālanetrastathāvṛttatanuśrotraḥ kuṇṭhoṣṭho

ghanāyatāgrakāyaḥ saṁkṣiptakarālo

nyastamastakodīrghajihvoviṣāṇopanītaḥ śīghrobahvaśanobhārasāho

manasvī durdamaḥ svayūthaparyantānucārī bhinnapurīṣo’tikramaṇavedī

kleśāsahaḥ krandanaśceti . miśrāstu teṣāṁ parasparasaṁyogajāḥ

sarvasaṁkulalakṣaṇā iti . bhadrā śreṣṭhābhavantyāsāṁ mandā madhyā

kanīyasī . mṛgā miśrā’dhikai rjñeyā guṇadoṣaiḥ samāsataḥ . atha

vanabhedena gajanedāḥ . athaiṣāṁ

prācyakārūṣadaśārṇamārgaṇeyakakāliṅkakāparāntikasaurāṣṭra

pañcanadākhyānyaṣṭau vanāni vāsasthānāni teṣāṁ pṛthak pṛtyak

karmalakṣaṇamupadekṣyāmaḥ tatra himavadgaṅgāprayāgalauhatyāntare

prācyavanamatrotpannāḥ kapilāḥ avyagrāḥ

kunakhapārṣṇayovāraṇāścalapṛthupecakavaṁśapiṇḍakāḥ

pṛthuhastāmandavegārūkṣāścapalākṛtayo bhavanti . (pecakaḥ

pucchabhūlam) mekalo matsyo gaṅgāvatāraśceti

kārūkākhyavanamatrotpannāḥ śyāmāścaṇḍāḥ sucaraṇāhrasvānātyāyatāḥ

śīghrodagrāvṛhadbhiruddāmairdantairdantino bhavanti .

mahāgiridaśārṇavindhyāṭavīrāvatīnāṁ madhye daśārṇaṁ

vanamabhikhyātamatra dīrghāṅgulipuṣkarāḥ pādmabhāḥ śyāmā vā

durgrahāḥ suvṛttajaghanāgrāḥ sitasūkṣmavinducitrāścūtaphalatulyamada

gandhinoviśālotsaṅgadantāḥ sthūlahastāsyaśirāgrīvā madhvakṣāḥ

svāsanāḥsatvavantaśca .

pāripātravaidiśabrahmāvartavanānāmantarmārgaṇeyakaṁ

vanamatrodagnāḥ śīghradīrghakrameṇopadigdhāṅgāḥ balavanto’bhijātāḥ

supramāṇāḥ madhvakṣāmṛdutvacaḥ kacāvilaprāyā

alpapecakāhariśyāvākhaṇḍacchannāḥ suhastāḥ snigdharomāṇaḥ sthirāḥ

suśarīrāḥ kureṇūnāmadhipatayaḥ svalpatāpāśca .

vipulasahyadakṣiṇāraṇyotkalānāṁ madhye kāliṅgakaṁ vanamatra

kalaviṅkākṣāḥ sarvaśvetāḥ sthirapadāḥ śīghrāḥ

mṛdvaruṇarīmāṇastanutvagudarādīrghakeśabāladhayo dīrghakramāḥ

balavanto’lpapecakāḥ padmaprabhā yāturudagnā

dhanuḥpṛṣṭhavaṁśāraktatālujihvauṣṭhāḥ

suprayogagrahasukhāḥvarāhajadhanāḥ nīcavṛttanakhāḥsthiracaraṇāḥ

āśusuvedinomadhudaśanāḥ pītahrasvaśirodharāḥ mahoragavṛhatkarāḥ

mṛdudīrghahastāhastino bhavanti .

narmadodadhisevadeśāntopahāraṇāmantarato’parāntikaṁ vanamatra

mānino dhīrāḥ śyāmāḥsaptapratiṣṭhitāḥ dṛśyajaghanaśirodharā

pīnāyataviṣāṇāḥ svāsyakā mṛdutvaca

udagrādīrgharaktatālvoṣṭhajihvāmahotsaṅgāḥ padmamadagandhino

dhanuḥpṛṣṭhavaṁśāvivṛttāsyānānyavanavicāriṇaḥ .

dvārakārbudāvartanarmadāntarataḥ saurāṣṭrakaṁ

vanamatrālpāyuṣaścaṇḍāḥ piṅgāyatākṣāḥ madhyāyatāṅghrayo’lpapecakā

mṛduvibhaktamātrāpratilomalomaśacara raṇāstanutvakkarṇanakhāḥ

sūkṣmadantāḥ śikṣātyaja iti . himavatsindhukurujāṅgalakānāmabhyantare

vanaṁ pañcanadākhyaṁ tatra

sphuṭitarūkṣaśvetāṁśudantāstanuvindūpacitakarāḥ

sugandhayogṛdavomahāpecakadeśāṅgapramāṇāḥsūkṣmavṛhattvacodurvin

eyādhyānaśīlāḥ kavalatṛṣo bhavantyapi . vaneṣveteṣu jāyante

pradhānāmadhyamottamāḥ . praśastā ninditāścāpi teṣāṁ vakṣyāmi

lakṣaṇam . namrajatukāṣṭhasaṅkāśaṁ hrasvamalpāṅgughapuṣraṁ

durgandhaṁ karkaśatvagromāṇamātatastavyasthūlaviralaparvāṇaṁ

hastino hastamadhyanyavighātadhanyaṁ pītaṁ

mṛduromāṇamanupūrvapatitaṁ cārudīrghāṅguliponaṁ

pṛthupuṣkaraṁmṛduvalinam . sugandhivṛttaṁ pañcahastāyataṁ

dviraktaṁ vṛhatcchrotogrovukāśa ca .

kakṣasphuṭitāhrasvamalinaviṣamacakrakhaṇḍasūkṣmadantāvapūjitau

pūjitau ca snigdhaślakṣṇapradakṣiṇonnatāmalinasamamāhitau

madhusavarṇau mukulitāgrāvāvādhamanyāyātāvaṣṭādaśāṅgulapariṇāhau

. atha virūpaviṣame varāhanakuladhvāṅkṣavānarābhe

rūkṣmavicchinnekṣaṇe sannimīlite locane na pūjite pūjite ca

kalaviṅkābhasūryamaṇi vahnitulye svanupahite ca . praśastaṁ

samāhitamāyatapṛthu

bāhityamavasthitaraktatālujihvauṣṭhacārusūkṣmaślakṣṇavindūpacitaṁ

sarvasaṁpūrṇam . mṛdumṛduniryāṇapīḍitapuṣkaraṁ viṣamamāsanāt

ṣaḍaṅgulāvāgbandhanābhāvena natakumbhalambambenātirikta

pramāṇaṁ ghaṇṭāghanapiṅga rūkṣāsthūladvandva romopacitamapūjitaṁ

śirovāraṇānāṁ pūjitaṁ

mahodayasthānamupavitasaptakamanimnakharaniryāṇaṁ pṛthupuṣkaraṁ

snigdhamṛdusūkṣṇayugnaromasuvibhaktoṣṇīṣavitānāvagrāhaṁ vā

hrasvītkruṣṭopakraṣṭau vṛttau stabdhau tanuviṣamasirātatau

pīḍitāntāvatiruddhapramāṇau saṁvṛtacchidrau

sāndramṛdusupramāṇasirālāvapāṭhitapuṭasaṁvipulamūlikau,

pṛṣṭhacchidrau dundubhisvanau vā .

kleśāvahācchidrātidīrghānupacitapīḍikā sumuhatī

pṛṣṭhālambanātyudgatāyatāsthānāvapīḍitā grīvā vāraṇasyāpraśastā śastā

tu prahvopari piṇḍikā dṛḍhārakṣī tri baliḥ sāsnāratniparīṇāhā

dvādaśāṅgulāyatā sarvasampūrṇā vā . viṣamamavāgraṁ

saṁkṣiptalamvaṁ saṁpuṭamānasaṁ vigarhitaṁ sthiraṁ ca

vinatamatyudgataṁ vaktaṁ pṛṣṭhavaṁśayaśobhanam .

śobhanamupacitasūkṣmaṁ dhanuḥpramāṇamevaṁ saṁsthānaṁ vidyāt .

atha pūrvagātrañchidronnatāṁsaṁ vikalitahastayorvṛttaṁ sirālambhanaṁ

stabdhavyādhidvandvohanirlagnaṁ viṣamakacābilam

pramāṇahīnamaniṣṭam iṣṭamanupūrṇopacitaṁ

sthiravimaktājilasatkīṭamanupavimbamukhamacchidrarandhropacitamath

oraktaṁ vā . atha jaghanaṁ ghanamucchritāsthi nirmāṁsapecakaṁ

kalāhīnātiriktapramāṇaṁ bāladhyanuyāyi samanarthakaram .

arthakaramatpapecakaṁ

palopacitamadṛśyaśuṣkaspaṣṭacaturasramāyatāgnaṁ

cārubāladhiparipūrṇāṇḍakoṣāyatatayā

nāsirālapallavākāramehanamajayanañjayanaṁ ca

śyāvālparūkṣasphuṭitanakhaśliṣṭasandhi, paruṣāsāratalasahā na pūjitāḥ

pādāḥ anye bhavantyapi ca . viṁśatyaṣṭādaśanakhāḥ sthirāḥ

kūrmasamāhitāḥ . gajānāṁ pūjitāḥ pādā ye ca syurvikacāvilāḥ . pādāḥ

kacāvilā rukṣavibarṇāḥ paruṣāḥ kṛśāḥ . vāraṇānānna śastāḥ syurye vā

snigdhatanūruhāḥ . sūkṣmabindu citāṁ snigdhāṁ tvacaṁ śaṁsanti

dantinām . āsyaspṛśau viśālasya viṣāṇau pārśvaunnatau . upāhato

viśālena dantaikena vāraṇaḥ . anunnatābhyāṁ saṁpannaḥkudantaḥ

syānnatāvadhiḥ . ūrdhvaṁ vaktrāntarālasya pratimānasamau dvijau .

hraṣvasthūlātidīrgheṇa dantenaikena vā guṇāḥ . varjyāste śubha kāmena

sarva evātigarhitāḥ . avdadvaye nadījānāṁ pañcame’vde vanaukasām .

dantamūlaparīṇāhān dviguṇānkalpayetpare .

śaraśaktidhanuścakraśūlapaṭṭisalakṣaṇāḥ . dantāgrarājayo yasya sa

nṛpaṁ voḍhumarhati . romṇāṁ tu saṁśrayo yaśca piṭaka sa udāhṛtaḥ .

saṁ jyeṣṭhaḥ saptabhāgonomadhyabho’sau mataṅgajaḥ . antyaḥ

ṣaḍḍāgahīnaḥ syādato’nyohi na pūjitaḥ . sukhāya pecake daighyaṁ

pṛṣṭhapārśvodarāntaram . ānāhaucchraya pādādvijñeyo yāvadāsanam .

vanaviśeṣeṇa gajalakṣaṇaṁ tatraiva vārhasyatyasaṁhitā . vanānāṁ

madhye prācyaṁ kāli ṅgakamāparāntikaṁ ca trīṇi vanānyatiśobhanāni .

trayāṇamapi prācyaṁ vanaṁ madhyavanamapareṣāmiva śobhanam .

tatrairāvatakulaprasūtisambhavāḥ prāyeṇa mṛgamiśrabhadraṇa kṣaṇāḥ

mahākāyāḥ kariṇo bhavanti .

vinayasatvaśaktisampannāḥpūgaphalaprabhāstāmratviṣaḥ praviralamadā

gajā yuddhecāpasarpaṇopasarvaṇanīravā bhavanti nātikrodhanāḥ

samudvejitāḥ satvaṁ darśayanti . te ca vṛkṣaiḥ kavalaiḥ

kāyopavaghātātiśayena madābhimukhāḥ kartṛvyāḥ . kāliṅgake

vā»parāntike ca tretāyugotpannāḥ mandā mahāgajānvayajā

mandābhidhānāḥ prāyaśo mṛgāvayavāḥ saṅkīrṇāgajāḥ samutpadyante .

nātyudagrā jaladaghrabhā nātisthirā mandā yuddhapriyāśca gajā bhavanti

. tathā kārūṣadāśārṇamārgaṇeyakābhidhāneṣu madhyamā gajāḥ

samutpadyante mṛgamandajātayaḥ te ca cārbavayavāḥ

madhyamabalāmadhyama pramāṇāḥ sthūlaromābilaśarīrāstanuradā

mandagatayaḥ . tathā saurāṣṭre pāñcanadābhidhāne dvāparayugotpannā

mṛgamataṅgajānvayā mṛgaprāyā gajābhavanti bhīravaḥ kutsitāṅgāḥ

nāticaṇḍādurmadāḥ durvṛttāśca evaṁvidhāgajāḥ samutpadyante vanācca

vanāntare gateṣudurvṛtteṣu gajeṣu dhenukāsamparkeṇa guptavane’pi

kāliṅgake’pi . trāsaśīlaśca bhīruśva hrasva vāmanamastakaḥ .

hīnāgrabhogo duḥśīlastvasaṁhataśarīrabhṛt . samucchritastvanāyāmī

parīṇāhavivarjitaḥ . mṛgasvarūpodīnaśca mṛgajātirgajādhamaḥ . ataḥ

paraṁ pravakṣyāmi saṁrkīṇṇasya ca lakṣaṇam . paśutvādvāraṇānāñca

gacchatāṁ ca viyoniṣu . dhenukāsu bhavantyete gajā saṁkīrṇalakṣaṇāḥ .

madromandomṛgovātha śuddhajātiḥ prajāyate . tasmānmiśrāṇi rūpāṇi

gadatome nibodhata . ānantyānmiśrajātānāṁ niścayonopapadyate .

tathāpi kiñcidudveśāmniśralakṣaṇamucyate . bhadramando bhadramṛgo

bhadramanda mṛgastathā . iha bhedatrayaṁ mandamṛgayorapi jāyate .

bhadrādīnāṁ ca sarveṣāṁ rūpaṁ saṁkīrṇasaṁjñitam . ūrdhvāghaḥ

kāryabhedena tajjanirmidyate dvidhā . tridhā ca bhidyatemūya ekaikantu

yathākramam . evamaṣṭādaśavidhaṁ kīrtitaṁ miśralakṣaṇam .

śubhāśubhaṁ vimāgena sāmpratam nigadāmyaham . bhadra

mandobhavediṣṭomṛgamandastathādhamaḥ . bhadramanda mṛgaścaiva

madhyamaḥ parikīrtitaḥ . bhadrajāti rmahākāyogajomadhye tu dantinām .

mando’vayavaleśena sa mukto bhavati dvipaḥ . mṛgasyāpi hi rūpeṇa

kiñciccānugatena vai . aśubhatvaṁ na bhadrasya jāyate śobhanohi saḥ .

locanānāṁ pradhānatvaṁ yasmācchāstreṣu kīrtitam .

tasmānmṛgākṣisaṁsaktobhadro’pi hi na śasyate . bhādreṇo parikāyena

māndenādhogatena vā . unnatohi gajānāntu bhadramandobhavedgajaḥ .

anenaiva hi rūpeṇa viparyāsena yo gajaḥ . so’pi śobhana eva

syānmandabhadraiti smṛtaḥ . evaṁ vidhāt mṛge cāpi

lakṣaṇānmiśralakṣaṇam . mahāvayavabāhulyāt mṛgarūpasyaleśataḥ .

bhadrāvayavanirmuktomadhyamo’sau gajo bhavet kāyena yo

bhavedbhadro sandovāpi mataṅgajaḥ . mṛgagātro’paraścaiva sa

bhavedvegavān gajaḥ . mṛgarūpādhikatvaṁ ca dṛśyate yasya dantinaḥ .

adhamastu sa vijñeyaḥ satvaśaktivivarjitaḥ . karadantākṣikumbhaiśca yo

mṛgojāyate gajaḥ . śeṣāvayavabhadro’pi hīna eva bhavedasau .

evamuddeśamātreṇa miśrabhedā mayoditāḥ . noditā ye’pi te’trāpi miśrā

jñeyā manīṣibhiḥ . miśralakṣaṇasaṁyoga uktaṣṭaṁ yasya dṛśyate .

rūpantannāmadheyo’sau jāyate hi mataṅgajaḥ . ataḥ

parampravakṣmāmilakṣaṇaṁ giricāriṇām . tathā nadī carāṇāṁ ca

tathaivobhamayacāriṇām . mahābalā mahākāyāścitāṁsā giricāriṇaḥ .

supāśvāścārudigdhāṅgādṛḍhapādāgataklamāḥ . udagrānirbhayāścaiva

sallakīkavalapriyāḥ . taṭāghātavidhau bhugnadantadārita bhūtalāḥ .

śārdūlādimahāsatvasaṁsphoṭātaṅkavarjitāḥ .

madasrāvakṣatotsāhādurdamāvāribhīravaḥ . pāṁśukrīḍāratā nityaṁ

drumonmūlanatatparāḥ . viṣāṇaveṣṭanāśīlāḥ kheṣṭasantāpanīrakāḥ .

karāgrasphoṭaniratā sītkārakaraṇapriyāḥ . anudagrāghanaśyāmāḥ

sīkarodgiraṇapriyāḥ . toyakarmaṇi niḥśaṅkāmataṅgāśca nadīcarāḥ .

ubhayeṣucarantye te nadīparvatasānuṣu . ye gajāhṛṣṭa manasaste

bhavantyatiśobhanāḥ . sarveṣāmeva nāgānāṁ chāyālakṣaṇamuttamam .

yadyathā jāyate yasya tattayaivābhidhīyate . satvāṁśakatvādbhadrasya

pāṭalā bhavati pramā . navapallavasacchāyā snigdhā tanutanūruhā .

tayātamo’ṁśakacācca kṛṣṇā mandasya jāyate . taruṇāmbuda saṁkāśā

sthūlakṛṣṇakavābilā . rajo’ṁśakatvācca tathā mṛgasyāpi hi dhūsarā .

malināmbudasaṁkāśā rūkṣā tanutanūruhāḥ . evaṁchāyāviśeṣāḥ

syurbhadrādīnānmayoditāḥ . chāyā saṁmiśrabhāvācca miśrā bhavati

dantinām . vanajātiguṇairbhadraḥ gajaśraiṣṭho narottama! .

tamo’śakatvaṁ mandasya yadyaduktaṁ nibodha me . durmanastvaṁ

tathā»lasyaṁ nidrālutvaṁ ca mūḍhatā . gambhīraveditā ceti mandasya

tama utthiteḥ . evaṁ rajīguṇo rājan mṛgastena rajo’ṁśakaḥ . dhairthyaṁ

sthairyaṁ paṭutvaṁ ca vinītatvaṁ sukarmatā . anvarthaveditā caiva

bhayasthāneṣu mūḍhatā . subhagatvaṁ ca dhīmattvaṁ satvasyaite

guṇāḥ smṛtāḥ . ataḥ satvāṁśakorājan bhadrajātirudāhṛtaḥ . citratvaṁ

bāhuśirasorantarmaṇigataṁ tathā . dantayormadhu varṇatvaṁ

netrayormadhupiṅgatā . āsanasya pṛthutvañca pūrṇatā kukṣipārśvapoḥ .

pṛthutvaṁ pṛṣṭhabhāgasya ghanatvaṁ samasandhitā . snigdhacchāyā

tvathāyāmaḥpariṇāhocchrayau tathā . saśrīkatvaṁ gurutvaṁ ca

kāyasyaite guṇāḥ smṛtāḥ . sarvalakṣaṇasaṁpūrṇo dṛśyate na mataṅgajaḥ

. pradhānāvayave loke yatnaḥ kāryo manīṣibhiḥ . hīnaṁ kṛṣṇaṁ ca

kalmāṣaṁ puṣkaraṁ na praśasyate . saṁpūrṇaṁ māṁsalaṁ raktaṁ

sukumāraṁ śubhaṁ smṛtam . tryaṅgulantubhaveddhīnaṁ

hīnampativināśanam . kṛṣṇaṁ bharturvighātāyakalmāṣaṁ bhartṛrīgadam .

saṁpūrṇaṁ siddhidaṁ bhartuḥ puṣkara caturaṅgulam .. saubhāgyadaṁ

māṁsalantu sukumāraṁ tathārthadam . raktapadmadalacchāyaṁ tathā

miṣṭānnapānadam . ataḥ paraṁ śubhejñeye śrītasī pāṭalodare .

pañcāṅgulapramāṇena vartulatvena cārthade . avāṅmukhaṁca tāmraṁ

ca karṇatālaṁ sukhapradam . hrasvā sthūlā ca vipulā citriṇī śyāmalonitā .

kuñcitā ca tathā dṛṣṭiḥ saptadhādantināṁ matā . tāsāṁ tu tryaṅgulāyāmā

sā hrasvetyabhisaṁjñitā . hrasvā karoti nṛpatervināśaṁ śīghrameva hi .

sthūla durbhikṣakaraṇī śyāmalā nṛpaduḥkhadā . karoti citriṇīnityaṁ

tasyaiva tu vasukṣayam . bhugnā dṛṣṭirvināśāya rājñodhanavināśinī .

kuñcitāhīnayoścaiva yudvakāle riporjayam . ataḥ paraṁ pravakṣyāmi

krameṇa karalakṣaṇam . na karaṁ dīrghamicchanti bāladheḥ

śāstrapaṇḍitāḥ . na bāladhisamaṁ hastaṁ nātidīrghaṁ kramāyatam . na

tanuṁ nātikāyaṁ ca na rūkṣaṁ na kṛtavraṇam . nākrameṇa kṛtotsedhaṁ

na hīnaṁ daśanāntaram . na hrasvāṅgulisaṁyuktaṁ

nātisaṁkaṭapuṣkaram . etallakṣaṇasaṁyuktaṁ karaṁ śaṁsanti kovidāḥ .

bāladheḥ susamohīnaḥ samovā dantiduḥkhadaḥ .

atidārghobhavedbharturāyuṣaḥ kṣayakārakaḥ . tanurvyādhikaro

yāturatikāyo’rthanāśanaḥ . rūkṣovyādhivraṇaṅkuryādyāturvraṇakṛtāṁ

vyathām . pratilomena ca sthūlogajasya susvanāśanaḥ .

asamañjasahīnaśva asamañjasa vartulaḥ . duḥkhaśokabhayāyāsakartā

bhavati nityaśaḥ . daśanāntarahīnaśca jāyate dantirīgakṛt . kathitaṁ

pūrvameveṣu puṣkarāṅgulilakṣaṇam . ato mayā na kathitaṁ

sāmprataṅkaralakṣaṇe . nirvalīkodīrgharomā kramavṛttatvasaṁyutaḥ .

aṇubinduvicitraśca dairvyeṇa ca śatāṅgulaḥ . bāladheḥ puṣkaraṁ

yāvadāyāmojātyape kṣayā . aratnitrayā»nāhaśca hīnahīnatarakramāt .

yuktastvanena mānena karaḥ pūjyatamo bhavet .. nirbalīke ca

saubhāgyandīrgharomārthadaḥ smṛtaḥ . kramavṛttojayaṁ

kuryādaṇubinduyutodhanam . supramāṇaṁ bhavedrājñaḥ karasya

parivardhanaḥ . ānāhabāṁśca satataṁ rājyasphītikarobhavet . karasya

kīrtitaṁ hyetallakṣaṇaṁ śubhasaṁjñitam . ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi

lakṣaṇaṁ dantabeṣṭayoḥ . kacahīnāvatisthūlau viṣamau śithilau tathā .

dantaveṣṭau sadā bhartuḥ pramāṇābhyāsasaukhyadau . dantamūle

susambadvau sakacau kiñcidunnatau . dṛṣṭau sadā tathā bharturvṛdvidau

parikīrtitī . ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi lakṣṇantu viṣāṇayoḥ . vyastatā

saṅkaṭatvaṁ ca prāṁśutā bhasmaśubhratā . vakratvaṁ hrasvatā caiva

dhūsaratvaṁ ca rūkṣatā . mṛdutā’dhogatitvañca hīnatā mūlamadhyayoḥ .

prāntayoḥ sthūlatā caiva dīrghatā cātimātratā . sarpacchatrakakāntitvaṁ

doṣāhyete caturdaśa . dantayostu samākhyātāḥ phalaṁ teṣānnibodha me

. vyastau ca saṅkaṭau dantau madahānikarau tu tau .

dantinastanutāyuktau vyādhidau parikīrtitau . bhasmaśubhrau tathā

bharturmahā kleśakarau matau . vakrau cārthavināśāya hrasvau ca

parikīrtitau . dhūsarau rūkṣatāyuktau gajasyāyurvināśanau .

mṛdutvayuktau nāgasya śalyavraṇakarau matau . sthūlāgrādho gatitve ca

bharturyātuśca duḥkhade . aśubhaṁ lakṣaṇaṁ hyetaddantayoḥ kathitaṁ

mayā . śubhaṁ ca sāmpratambakṣye yathāvadanupūrvaśaḥ . snigdhau

samau suniṣkrāntau saṁpūrṇauvraṇavarjitau . mukulāgrau dṛḍhau vāpi

tāmnacūḍau halopamau . dakṣiṇābhyunnatau kiñcit

mṛṇālakumudaprabhau . mudhakundadalacchāyau hemacamprakapiñjarau

. madhupiṅgau ghṛtacchāyau pīpūṣasadṛśaprabhau . ketakīkusumābhau

ca mṛgāṅkakiraṇaprabhau . adhyardhvāratnimānau ca

tadardhānāhasaṁyutau . amīmirlakṣaṇairyuktau dantau nāgasya

sammatau . snigdhau dhanapradau bharturāyuṣaśca karau matau .

arighnau tu suniṣkrāntau saṁpūrṇau rājyadau matau . nirvraṇau

rājyalābhāya mukuṭāgrau jayapradau . dṛḍhau rogavināśāya tāmravūḍau

halopamau . arisaṁghavināśāya kīrtitauśāstrapaṇḍitaiḥ .

dakṣiṇābhyunnatau bhartuḥ kīrtitau bhāgyakārakau .

mṛṇālakumudacchāyau subhikṣārogyakārakau . hemacampakasaṅkāśau

vajrāmaraṇadau smṛtau . kuruto madhupiṅgau ca niḥsapatnaṁ mahītale .

paśulābhakarau jñeyau ghṛtapīpūṣasannibhau . ketakīkusumābhau ca

bharturvaṁśavivardhanau . adhyardvāratnikaudantau

sutabhṛtyajayapradau . ānāhamānasaṁyuktau sadāsphītikarau matau .

idaṁ śubhakaraṁ rājan! dantayorlakṣaṇaṁ matam . ataḥparaṁ

pravakṣyāmi netrayorapi lakṣaṇam .

mārjāranakulakrauñcaśākhāmṛganimekṣaṇān . sarvadoṣakarān rājan!

gajān dūreṇa varjayet . snigdhe madhunibhedīpte kalaviṅkākṣisannibhe .

raktapadmadalacchāye padmarāgamaṇiprabhe . nirdhūmāgniśikhākāre

indranīlasamaprabhe . saumyadṛṣṭisamāyukte tryaṅgule locane śubhe .

snigdhe vṛddhikare bharturmadhupiṅge jayaprade . dīpte dīptikare caiva

pratāpāyatane tathā . kalaviṅgākṣirūpe ca dhanadhānyavivardhane .

cāmīkarakare nityaṁ raktapadmadalaprabhe . padmarāganibhecaiva

ratnālaṅkārakārake . nirdhūmāgniśikhākāre pratipakṣabhayaṅkare .

mānayukte ca saumye ca locane balavardhane .

akṣikūṭakaṭoddeśanimnau rājyavināśanau . saṁpūrṇau ca

balotsāhamadavṛdvikarau matau . dantāśrayaṁ bhavennityaṁ tālukaṁ

ṣoḍaśāṅgulam . ṣaḍaṅgulaṁ pṛthutvena vaṁśa gadhyagataṁ bhavet .

tathā śubhāśubhaṁ caiva lakṣaṇajñaiḥ prakīrtitam .

kṛsaramparidagdhañca kṛṣṇaṁkalmāṣamevavā . caturvidhamaniṣṭaṁ

syādyathāvadabhidhīyate . kṛṣṇaṁ masīsamaṁ jñeyaṁkalmāṣaṁ

kṛṣṇalohitam . māṁsalaṁ dhūmravarṇaṁ ca paridagdhaṁ prakī rtitam .

kṛsarañca tilacchāyaṁ kathitaṁ śāstravedibhiḥ . garbhasthasya yadā

pittaṁ vīyate tālukaṁ bhṛśam . kṛṣṇatālustadā nāgojāyate pāpalakṣaṇaḥ .

vyāghibhiḥ pīddhyate nityaṁ vātapittakaphodbhavaiḥ . tṛtīyāṁ vā

catuthīṁ vā daśāṁ prāpya vinaśyati . saṁgrāme vā palāyeta

bahuśastrakṛtavraṇṇaḥ . śastra saṅghātapūrṇāṅgaḥ kṛtāntabhavanaṁ

vrajet . vātapittakaphā yasya kurvanti tāluke gadam . garbhasthasyaiva

kalmāṣatālukaṁ tasya jāyate kṛṣṇatāluni ye doṣā rakte caiva guṇāḥ

smṛtāḥ . kalmāṣa tālunastetu bhavanti ca dvayorapi . raktacchāyaṁ yadā

vaṁśe pārśvayostvasitaṁ bhavet . tadā madhyaphalaṁ jñeyaṁ guṇadoṣa

samāśrayāt . yadā vaṁśe ca kṛṣṇaṁ syātpārśvayostāmratā bhavet .

bharturudvegajanakaṁ kalmāṣaṁ tālukaṁ tadā . kiñciddhīnaṁ tu yattālu

paridagdhaṁ tadā bhavet . nāgasyādhoraṇasyāpi balakṣayakaraṁ hi tat .

kṛsaraṁ ca bhavet tālu pittakopasamudbhavam . mahāmātravināśāya

vāraṇasyopajāyate . (mahāmātrohastipakaḥ) kṛṣṇatālorapi yadā

dakṣiṇāvartanaṁ bhavet . dṛśyate nityamevaṁ hi tadāsau doṣavarjitaḥ .

yathā gṛhṇāti no doṣān sulokaḥ musamāhitaḥ . guṇān karoti hṛdaye na

tathā kathitānapi . doṣaghnaṁ lakṣaṇaṁ śastaṁ yadācāryairudāhṛtam .

tattathaivāvagantavyaṁ nānyathātrāpi bhāṣitam . evaṁ jihvāpi mantavyā

tālunaḥ samalakṣaṇā . aratnimātrā dairghyeṇa vistāre’ṣṭāṅgulā matā .

aśubhaṁ lakṣaṇaṁ hyetattālukasya mayoditam . śubhaṁ ca sāmprataṁ

vakṣye lakṣaṇaṁ śṛṇucānagha! . raktaṁ śvetaṁkaṣāyaṁ ca tālukaṁsyāt

śubhapradam . raktaṁ vṛddhikaraṁ bhartustathā cāyurvivardhanam .

dantino’śokapuṣpābhaṁ ripukṣayakarammatam . śvetaṁ puṣṭikaraṁ cāpi

vā raṇasyopajāyate . campakābhaṁ tathā bharturāraugyasya

vivardhanam . kaṣāyaṁ sarvadā khyāta prayātuḥ saukhyavardhanam .

evaṁ jihvāpi raktābhā sarvasaukhyapradā matā . ataḥpara pravakṣyāmi

sṛkkaṇyāśritya lakṣaṇam . dantino mānahīne ca sṛkkaṇī mānavarjite .

(sṛkkaṇī oṣṭhasandhī) mukharīgakare nityaṁ paṇḍitaiḥ parikīrtite .

sarvasaukhyaprade tasya saṁpūrṇe dvādaśāṅgule . ataḥparaṁ va

pravakṣyāmi lakṣaṇaṁcivukoṣṭhayoḥ . aromaśambalīyuktamātāmraṁ ca

tathā laghu . gajasyauṣṭhaṁ na śaṁsanti munayo dantarogadam .

dīrgharomā susaṁpūrṇa oṣṭhaḥ padmadalaprabhaḥ . ṣoḍaśāṅgulānāhaśca

hastārdhaṁ vāyataḥ śubhaḥ . bharturāyuḥkarodīrgho dīrgharomā ca

kīrtitaḥ . pūrṇaḥ pūrayate kośaṁ raktaḥ saubhāgyadobhavet . aromaśaṁ

tathāhīnaṁ cibukaṁ na praśasyate . taddhi vāraṇanāthasya

mukharogakarammatam . caturaṅgulamānantu sthūlaṁ romāvilaṁ yat

tatpraśastaṁ gajendrāṇāṁ sukhālaṅkhārakārakam . nimne ca viṣame

caiva hīne caivāśubhe mate . madahānikare nitya sagade karṇarogade .

śaśvanninādayukte ca same caiva sukhaprade . mānaṁ ca karṇapālyāstu

mūlādārabhya gṛhyate . bāhitthāvaghi kumbhaṁ ca hīnaṁ nimnaṁ ca

garhitam . mukharogakaraṁ nitya satyahānikaraṁ ca tat . pūrṇaṁ

caivonnataṁ sārdhahastamātrāyataṁ bhavet . taddhi vāraṇanāthasya

mukharogakaraṁ matam . caturaṅgugamāna tu sthūlam romābilañca yat

. tat praśastaṁ gajendrāṇāṁ sukhālaṅkārakārakam . aratnipariṇāhañca

kariṇāṁ satvaśaktidam . vāmanaṁ hastahīnañca pariṇāhavivarjitam .

avyaktañca na śaṁsanti vātakumbhaṁ vipatkaram .

dvādaśāṅgulavistārandairghyeṇāṣṭādaśāṅgulam . vyaktaṁśuktipuṭākāraṁ

tadbharturlābhakārakam . gartākāre ca niryāṇe kaṭhine cātikutsite .

śirasorogajanane gajasyārohakasya ca . saṁpūrṇe sukumāre ca

supraśaste prakīrtite . rājyavṛddhikare nityaṁ bharturvijayakārake .

idameva hi vijñeyaṁ lakṣaṇaṁ kaṭapārśvayoḥ . ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi

lakṣaṇaṁ kumbhayorapi . viṣamatvamaromatvaṁ dehacchāyāvivarṇatā .

samatā kaṇṭhapṛṣṭhābhyāṁ samādhikyamapūrṇatā . vyaktatā

vāmanatvaṁ ca pariṇāhavihīnatā . tanubhāvaḥ śikharayoḥ kumbhadoṣā

daśa smṛtāḥ . bhartuścāpatkarau jñeyau viṣamau romavarjitau .

dehacchāyāvivarṇau tu śatrulokavivardhanau . kaṇṭhapṛṣṭhasamau caiva

prayātuḥ pravināśanau . mānādhikau ca hīnau ca bharturucchedakārakau

. vyāptau ca vāmanau caivabhartuḥ kīrtivināśanau . pariṇāha vihīnau ca

kośakṣayakarau matau . śikharasya tanutvena yuktau kumbhau tu

rogadau . aśubhaṁ lakṣaṇaṁ hyetatsāmpratañca śubhaṁ śṛṇu . samau

dīrghakacākrāntau vistīrṇaśikharau tathā . karṇa mūlātsamārabhya

hastārdvajamitocchrayau . susaṁhatau ca pīnau ca kāminīkucasannibhau

. samākāntalalāṭau ca dehacchāyā samaprabhau .

ārohakaśarīrārdhadarśanāvaraṇakṣamau . saśrīkau ca suvṛttau ca śubhau

kumbhau prakīrtitau . samau ca dīrgharomāṇau bhartuḥ

śrīsaukhyakārakau . samānau ripunāśāya tathaiva ca samunnatau .

susaṁhatau ca pīnau ca varastrīlābhakārakau . śatrunāśakarau jñeyau

kāminīkucasannibhau . samākrāntalalāṭau ca susvadau roganāśanau .

ārohisthagitārdhau ca saśrīkau ca jayapradau . vṛttau ca hastināṁ

kumbhau puṣpālaṅkārakārakau . ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi karṇayorapi

lakṣaṇam . nirlomaśau snasākīrṇau tanucchidrau tanutvacau . (snasā

sirā) saṅkaṭau viṣamau rūkṣau tru ṭitāgrau ca niṣṭhurau . stabdhau ca

vartulau caiva karṇau nāgasya ninditau . phalañca sāmprataṁ vakṣye

yathāvadanupūrvaśaḥ . nirlomaśau snasākīrṇau gajasya karṇarogadau .

niṣṭhurau truṭitāgrau ca yātuḥkośaharau matau . stabdhau ca vartulau

caiva gajasyāyurvināśanau . ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi

śubhakarṇaviniścayam . dviratnimānasaṁyuktau sirājālavivarjitau .

saptatvacau mahācchidrau snigdhau dundubhi nisvanau .

kapolamaṇḍalāsphālāttataśabdau muhurmuhuḥ . karṇau

cāmarasaṁkāśau mṛduromakṛtārcanau .

ajarjaramṛduprāntāvīṣadguptāvacūlikau . mayūratālavṛntābhau

suvistīrṇasamau śubhau . dviratnimānasaṁyuktau bharturāyuḥkarau

matau . snasājālavinirmuktau śirorogavināśakau . samatvacau

mahācchidrau gajalābhakarau matau . snigdhaukāntikarau nityaṁ

jayadau dundumisvanau . śatrunāśakarau proktau mṛduromīkṛtatārcanau .

ajarjaramṛduprāntau prayātuḥ saukhyakārakau . gajasyopacayāyaiva

īṣadguptāvacūlikau . mayūratālavṛntābhau turaṅgabalavardhanau .

suvistīrṇau samau bhartu rbhūmilāmakarau matau . karṇayostu

samākhyātaṁ mayaitatśubhalakṣaṇam . kaṇṭhasya sāmprataṁ vakṣye

yathāvadanupūrvaśaḥ . avakrohīno dīrghaśca kaṇṭhaśca śubhadobhavet .

ārohakaprabhūṇāñca kramaśaḥ kuñjarasya ca . avakraḥ pariṇāhena

saptaṣaṣṭyadhikaṁ śatam . aṅgulānāṁ tathāyāme dvādaśaivāṅgulāni tu .

sampūrṇapiṇḍitodagraścāntarmaṇivibhūṣitaḥ . kaṇṭhovāraṇanāthasya

evaṁ bhūtaḥ supūjitaḥ . ṛjuḥ pramodajananaḥ sampūrṇaḥkāryasiddhidaḥ

. ahrasvojayakṛdbhartuḥ kīrtitaḥ pūrṇapiṇḍakaḥ . udagrovaṁśavṛddhiṁ ca

pratāpaṁ kurute tathā . antarmaṁṇisamāyuktomaṇiratnaprado bhavet .

karālañcātinimnaṁ ca āsanaṁ na praśasyate . karālaṁ yāturaśubhaṁ

nimnaṁ ca vraṇakārakam . dairghyeṇa hastamātraṁ tu vistīrṇañca

śubhaṁ smṛtam . vistīrṇaṁ vistṛtaṁ rājyaṁ sampūrṇaṁ kurute jayam .

vaṁśasyātha pravakṣyāmi lakṣaṇaṁ tu śubhāśubham .

atyucchritonimnapāraḥ hrasvo vaṁśonaśasyate . rājñāṁ ca pādarogāṇāṁ

kartā ca sa mavetsadā . ṣaṇṇavatyaṅgulāyāsamāsanātpaścimāsanam .

yāvat prapūryate pārśvavaṁśo’śvaphalakākṛtiḥ . śubho jñeyo

gajendrāṇāmāyāmaḥ kurute sukham . pūrṇapārśvastu lābhāya

dhanuḥpṛṣṭhaḥ śriyaṁ nayet . aratnidvayamānaṁ tu

pecakātpaścimāsanam . ghanāsthi viṣamaṁ nimnaṅgahitaṁ

puccharogadam . māṁsopacayapūrṇaṁ ca vistīrṇañca śubhaṁ matam .

jaghanopari rogāṇāṁtaddhi nāśakaraṁ matam . (pecakātpucchamūlāt) .

pucchogajasya no śasto bahudīrgho’tilambitaḥ . karoti mahatīṁ

pīḍāṁrājñaścādhoraṇasya ca . dvyaṅgulastu pṛthutvena

dairghyeṇāṣṭādaśāṅgulaḥ . saṁpūjyaḥ pecakojñeyo gajabhartuḥ

sukhapradaḥ . vakraṁ sthūlañca hrasvaṁ ca pucchaṁ kacavivarjitam .

samānāhaṁ ca nāgasya sarvadoṣakaraṁ bhavet . avakra ṛjudīrghaśca

granthihīnaḥ supecakaḥ . gopucchabālapratimakacabrātavibhūṣitaḥ .

bhūmiṁ tu na spṛśet yastu caturbhiścāṅgulaiḥ sadā . sa śubho

bāladhirjñeyo gajabhartṛsukhapradaḥ . atipramāṇaṁ hrasvaṁ ca

karvūraṁ vigataprabham . sirālaṁ cāśubhaṁ meḍhraṁ

rājahastipaduḥkhadam . śastaṁ ṣaḍaṅgulāyāmaṁ nāhataḥ ṣoḍaśāṅgulam

. sirājālavinirmuktamāmrapallavasaprabham . dvyaṅgulaṁ srotasā

yuktaṁ vindumātravivarjitam . meḍhraṁ praśastaṁ vijñeyaṁ

bharturjīvitavardhvanam . ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi lakṣaṇaṁ gātrayīrapi .

hīne tanūca dīrghe ca samamāṁsocchraye tathā . viṣame ca kacākrānte

gātre nāgasya nindite . hīne tanū ca kurutaḥ prayāturvinipātanam .

samamāṁsocchraye yāturviṣame ca vipatkare . kavāvile gajasyaiva

gātrarogakaretathā . ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi mātrayoḥ śubhalakṣaṇam .

sārdhadviratnistriratniḥ śatāṅgulasamānatā . evaṁmite smṛte gātre

bharturārogyasaukhyade . same ca kacahīne ca gajalābhakare tathā .

gajasya puṣṭide nityaṁ māṁsale ca ghane smṛte . mātre vāraṇanāthasya

evaṁbhūte śubhe mate . cipiṭe vā saphalake gātrarogakare sadā .

saṁpūrṇe rājyade bharturgajasya vasusuprade . tathaiva romanihite

gajasya galoragade . ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi nakhānāñca śubhāśubham .

hīnāḥkṛṣṇāśca khaṇḍāśca rūkṣāśca na nakhāḥ śubhāḥ . sadā ca rogadā

hīnāḥkṛṣṇā bhartṛvināśanāḥ . khaṇḍārūkṣāgajasyaiva

pādavyādhivivardhanāḥ . snigdhāścandrārdhasaṅkāśā mānenaiva

puronakhāḥ . saptādipañca saṁkhyāni aṅgulāni krameṇa hi . evaṁ

vidhānakhāḥ śastā bharturārogyakārakāḥ . ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi

pādayorapi lakṣaṇam . hīnau suṣṭhutalau rūkṣau caraṇau dantiduḥkhadau

. hastapramāṇau dairghyeṇa kūrmākārau sukhapradau . ataḥparaṁ

pravakṣyāmi lakṣaṇañcāparāśritam . atyucchrite ca hīne ca nindite cāpare

tanū . sampūrṇeca śubhe jñeyetryaratnyāyāmasaṁ yute . nindite rogade

jñeye pūjite prabhusaukhyade . dvādaśāṅgula hīnaṁ tu

āsanātpaścimāsanam . aparapādayoścāpi āyāmo’ratnimātrakaḥ .

nakhānāṁ ca tathā mānaṁ ṣaḍādicaturaṅgulam . pradhānāvayavānāntu

lakṣaṇaṁ kathitaṁ yathā . utsedhāyāmanāhānāṁ sāmprataṁ

kathayāmyaham . samatantusamāyuktatantunā vartitena ca . supraśaste

dine nityaṁ mānaṁ kurvīta mānavit . saptāratni gajendrāṇāṁ pramāṇaṁ

vanajanmanām . āsanaṁ yāvadutsedhastalasandhisu kīrtitaḥ .

pecakātpratimānantu āyāmoratnayo nava . madhyadeśe tadānāhoṁ

daśaratniḥ prakīrtitaḥ mānametaddhi bhadrasya munibhiḥpariprakīrtitam .

saptamena tu bhāgena hīnaṁ mandasya jāyate . mandāddhīnaṁ

mṛgākhyasya ṣaḍbhāgena prakīrtitam . evaṁ krameṇa vaktavyaṁ mānaṁ

mānaviśāradaiḥ . kiñcinmānādhike vāpi na doṣaḥ saṁprapadyate .

doṣāṇāṁ ca guṇānāñca vṛddhireva phalapradā . satvaṁ hi

vāraṇendrāṇāṁ nityaṁ tantreṣu saṁsthitam . snigdhe madhunibhe dīpte

kalaviṅkākṣisannibhe . raktapadmadalacchāye padmarāgamaṇiprabhe .

nīlacchāye atīkṣṇe ca gaje satvaṁ pratiṣṭhitam . mājāravānarādīnāṁ

sadṛśe nobalaṁ gaje . hīnasatvāśca jāyante girikūṭopamā api .

adhikaṁpuṣakaraṁ yasya māṁsalatvena jāyate . prabhayāca kaṣāyaṁ

syānmānenāṅgulapañcakam . kiñcidūne ca vijñeye śrotasī caturaṅgule .

sthūlapañjāṅgulāyāmā tryaṅgulā nāha mānatā . hasto’pi pūrvamānasya

sthūlatvenādhikobhavet . romaśonātivṛddhaśca pṛthulaḥ ṣaḍbhiraṅgulaiḥ .

āyāmena ca hīnaḥsyāt pūrvamānāt ṣaḍaṅgulaiḥ .

nātigopucchasaṁsthānaḥkṛṣṇavinduvibhūṣitaḥ . ānāhe ratni mānau tu

sārdhahastadvayāyatau . pīyūṣakumudacchāyau kiñciccampakapiṅgalau .

snigdhau mugdhatabhāveva dantau nāgasya kīrtitau .

dantāveṣṭāvatisthūlau kacākrāntau suniṣṭhurau . pañcāṅgulau kaṭau

jñeyau māṁsīpacayapūritau . jñeye kaṭopari tathā śrotasī dvyaṅgulāntare

. ekāśītyaṅgulānāhe dvāviṁśatyaṅgulāyate . kiñcinnataṁ kacākrāntaṁ

vāhitthaṁ parikīrtitam . patimānaṁ tu vijñeyaṁ hastaḥ sacaturaṅgulaḥ .

adhyardharatnimānaṁ ca pramāṇāntarabhedataḥ . āyāmamanu

vijñeyastvadharastu daśāṅgulaḥ . viṁśatyaṅgumānastu

pariṇāho’bhidhīyate . pañcāṅgulaṁ tu cibukaṁ sṛkviṇī tu navāṅgule .

ṣaḍviṁśadaṅgulāyāme saṅgate parikīrtite . adhyardharatnikau karṇau

vistāreṇa kacācitau . kaṣāyapallavau sthūlau kṛṣṇavinduvicitritau .

saṣadbhāmakarāyāmāvavacūlau kacāvilau . pañcāṅgulāntarau

pīnāvubhāvoṣṭhau daśāṅgulau . karṇāt karṇāntaraṁ yāvat

ṣaṇṇavatyaṅgulaṁ śiraḥ . vātakumbhaṁ tathā jñeyaṁ sthūlaṁ

saptadaśāṅgulam . aṅgulānāṁ śataṁ sārdhamānāhi dvyaṅgulāghikam .

āyatatvaṁ ca kaṇṭhasya daśāṅgulamiti smṛtam . bhadrasyaivāsanaṁ

jñeyaṁ tathoktaṁ saptaratnikam . ṣaḍaṅgulocchritaṁ sthūlaṁ tulyaṁ

lāṅgūlamānataḥ . pucchamūlād dvihastantu jāyate paścimāsanam .

ucchrayeṇa tu hīnaṁ syādāsanaṁ ṣaḍabhiraṅgulaiḥ .

pecakastryaṅgulāyāmolambatvenāṅgulatrayam . viṁśatyaṅgulamānāhe

bhavet pucchoyathāgamam . prāntapādakrameṇaiva

tathāyāme’ṅgulatrayam . dairvyeṇa tu sa vijñeyo

bhūmeraṣṭāṅgulocchritaḥ . idaṁ bāladhimānaṁ tu mandasya parikīrtitam

. sārdhadvyaratnike mūle aparesaṁprakīrtite . udare cātimātraṁ

syānmeḍhraṁ hastadvayāyatam . viṁśatyaṅgulamānāhe kṛṣṇacchāyaṁ

sadā bhavet . pañca catvāri ca trīṇi aṅga lāni nakhāḥ kramāt .

āpāṇḍuvivarāḥ kundābhāsāścāparapādayoḥ . anenaiva tu mānena

gātrapādasamāśrayāḥ . nakhā mandasya vijñeyāścaraṇāśca kacābilāḥ .

atisthūlaḥ pṛthutvena sārdhahastādhikaḥ karaḥ . aratnikaṁ vā,

dairghyeṇa pramāṇaṁ gātrayorapi . uromaṇi stathā

jñeyoratnimātro’timāṁsalaḥ . viṁśatyaṅgulamānastu

antargalamaṇirbhavet . anenaiva hi mānena vātakumbhaḥ prakīttitaḥ .

ete praśastā mandasya mūnātha! kathitāstava . noktā ye te’pi bhadrasya

vijñeyāḥ samalakṣaṇāḥ . mṛgasya sāmprataṁ vakṣye pradeśān

lakṣaṇānvitān . tryaṅgulaṁ puṣkaraṁ tasya tryaṅgule śrotasī tathā .

aṅgulāni ca catvāri kīrtitāstasya cāṅgulāḥ . tanuḥ karaḥ

tryaratniḥsyādānāhe sārdharatnikaḥ . bāhitthāt puṣkaraṁ yāva nmānaṁ

sadbhirudāhṛtam . tathā tanutarau dantau dīrghye sārdhadvyaratnikau .

hrasvau ca mastakau syātāntayoḥ saptadaśāṅgulau . pratimānaṁ tathā

jñeyaṁ nimnaṁ pañcadaśāṅgulam . dvyaṅgulaṁ cibukaṁ

tasmādadharastu ṣaḍaṅgulaḥ . aṣṭādaśāṅgulānāhe sṛkvaṇī tu ṣaḍaṅgule .

syātāmaṅgulaviṁśatyau kapolau nimnamadhyagau . kaṭau dvyaṅgumānau

tu niryāṇe caturaṅgule . netre cāpi tathā syātānniṣprabhesthūlatārake .

nātivyaktaṁ samāṁsaṁ spādvātakumbhaṁ daśāṅgulam . gartākārañca

nimnaṁ ca kaṭakumbhaṁtathaiva tu . aṣṭāṅgulāntaraṁ kumbha āyāme

ṣoḍaśāṅgulaḥ . viṁśatyaṅgulakau karṇau stabdhau rūkṣau ca vartulau .

ṣaṇṇavatyaṅgulānāhā āyāme ṣoḍaśāṅgulā . grīvā mṛgasya vijñeyā

karālamāsanaṁ bhavet . sārdhadvyaratnikāyāmaḥ kubjatuṅgo’timātrayā .

vaṁśomṛgasya vijñeyo nimnatalpanibhaprabhaḥ . sthūlāsthi viṣamaṁ

nimnaṁ pucchamadhyardharatnikam . āsanena samaṁ caiva mṛgasya

paścimāsanam . pañcāṅgulastu vijñeyaḥ pecakogudasaṁsṛtaḥ .

kacāgranthisamākīrṇaḥ sthūlohrasvaśca bāladhiḥ .

aparāpādapārṣṇibhyāṁ hastamātrasamucchrayaḥ .

dīrghatanuruhacchannodvisaptatyaṅgulāyataḥ . tatpramāṇe tathā gātre

cipiṭe cāpi niṣprabhe . caraṇāśca gatacchāyaiścatustridvyaṅgulairnakhaiḥ

. saṁyuktāḥsphuṭitā nimnā mānenāṣṭādaśāṅgulāḥ . etaduddeśamātreṇa

kathitaṁ mṛgalakṣaṇam . ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi teṣāṁ balaparīkṣaṇam

. gajā na balarhānena surūpeṇāpi śobhanāḥ guṇeṣvapi balaṁ śreṣṭhaṁ

tat parīkṣīta paṇḍitaḥ . śarīrāntargataḥ prāṇo balaśabdena kīrtyate .

kriyate vāraṇasyātha tasyopāyaiḥ parīkṣaṇam . jāmbūnadasya tāmrasya

palānāṁ rajatasya vā . aṣṭādaśasahasrāṇi yuktyā saṁgṛhya vegavān .

daśayojanamadhvānaṁ gacchati śramavarjitaḥ . yo gajo gajamadhye tu

sa uttamabalaḥ smṛtaḥ . yaścaturdaśasāhasrabhāramādāya gacchati .

saptayojanamadhvānaṁ sa madhyamabalomataḥ . daśasāhasrikaṁ

bhāraṁ gṛhītvā pañcayojanam . adhvānaṁ yohi saṁyāti sa hīnabala

ucyate . satribhāgadvihastena pariṇāhena saṁyutam .

caturhastanisvātaṁ tu yobhinattyuttamohi saḥ . atha votpāṭayedvāpi

balena mahatā yutaḥ . sārdhatrihastakhātantu saptahastocchritaṁ tathā .

pañcāśadaṅgulīkena pariṇāhena saṁyutam . bhinatti yogajaḥ śīghraṁ

kṣipatyuddhṛtya vā punaḥ . sa gajānāntu sarveṣāṁ madhye madhyabalo

mataḥ . hastatrayanikhātantu ṣaḍhastocchrayameva vā . yuktaṁ

sthūlatayā caiva pūrvasaṁkhyārdhamātrayā . bhinatti helayā yastu

utkhātaṁ vā karoti vā . stambhaṁ kuñjaramadhyetu sa hīnabala ucyate .

gurutvaṁ ca yataḥ śreṣṭhaṁ gurutvādadhikaṁ balam . balādabhyadhikaṁ

satvaṁ tasmātsatvaṁ nirūpayet . śuddhasphaṭitasaṅkāśaṁ satvaṁ hṛdi

śarīriṇām . durlakṣyaṁ vidyate samyagupāyaistaddhi lakṣayet .

supraśaste dine lagne gajogairikamaṇḍitaḥ . karṇe

cāmaraśaṅkhādisukhābharaṇabhūṣitaḥ .

pādāndolanasaṁjātaghaṇṭāravanibhasvanaḥ .

ārohakakarāsphālakṛtotsāhonnatā nanaḥ . atyantaṁ ḍhokayecchrīghraṁ

pārśvakolāhalākulaḥ . vegotthānakṛtāsphoṭadantasaṁghaṭṭamardanaiḥ .

kṛtāṁ kāmapi na hastasya vedanāṁ yo na manyate . yo hi

madaiḥkṛtāsphālaiḥ svakaṭaṁ bhartumicchati . nāpasarpati

bhītyānopratiyātaṁ raṇāt kvacit . kaṇṭhagarjitanādena

paripūritadigmukhaḥ . nivartyate ca duḥkhena sa bhavet satvavān gajaḥ .

pa tyaśvasamūhaṁ vā gajamālātimīṣaṇam .

rāgotthānasamudbhūtagambhorakalahākulam . utthāya samare

gacchedroṣarañjitalocanaḥ . dantadāraṇarāgeṇa pratināgakṛtekṣaṇaḥ .

prasāritairatistarvairniḥśaṅkaṁ karṇapallavaiḥ . yo gacchatyativegena sa

bhavet satvavāngajaḥ . śārdūlākṛtisatvānāṁ trāsavarjitamānasaḥ .

kṛtakaṁ ca tathā nāgaṁ yobhinattyuttamo hi saḥ .

dāvānalaśikhiśreṇīśabdasaṁtrāsavarjitaḥ . vaneṣu vicaratyeṣa sa

satvasahito gajaḥ . kṛtaśaṅkāvaśādyastu na vārohiṇamīyate . saṅkacan

mastakaṁ dīnomandānmandataro bhavet . ālokayati pārśvāni

cītkārakaraṇapriyaḥ . ālokayati soṣmabhyāṁ locanābhyāmpratidvipam .

padātyaśvasamūhaṁ vā jvalantamiva manyate . adhamastu suvijñeyo

gaja saḥ śramavarjitaḥ . yastusaṁdhaṭate mandaṁ ghaṭitaścāpasarpati .

tathāpasarpya vegena dantāghātaṁ prayojayet . kiñcittiryanmukhobhūtvā

kṛtacītkāranisvanaḥ . kurute dantasaṁghātam sa vijñeyo’ghamogajaḥ .

prathamādipañcasudaśāsu madavikārabhedamuktvāha tatraiva .

taṭatarubhavanonmūlanaratastu ṣaṣṭyāṅgajo bhavati .

karavadanākṣikaṭasthala galanmadasalilasiktabhūmitalaḥ . saṁgrāme

ripubharakaravimuktaśaranikaraśalyasahaḥ . karavīrapuṣpalohitalīghanaḥ

sa cārudāruṇākāraḥ . pratināgasaṁghadāraṇaprakṛtiraṁśalastu

saptamyām . na śṛṇeti naiva paśyati ca na bhayañjānāti sarvasatvakṛtam

. yaśca ghanāsphālitaṁ mukharitaṁ cānanaṁ patati kārayan . na sahante

tasya gandhaṁ saṅkocitagātrakubjakarakaṭāḥ kariṇaḥ . marditanijabalā

vimuktanādāḥ praṇaśyanti . na tathā śaṅkhābharaṇairna

cāmarairnākṣamālābhiḥ . bhavati yathā madasārairmukhasya śobhā

gajendrāṇām . klamavirahitā bhavati hi ṣaṣṭhī vā pañcamī caturthī vā .

donāvasthā kariṇāṁ satvavatāṁ madaviśeṣeṇa . ativṛddhamadavikāre

mṛhyanti śiśumade’pi mātaṅgāḥ . satvātirekayuktābalasya śobhāṁ parāṁ

prāptāḥ . sthalabhede na madodgamaphalaṁ tatraivāha . kurute

narapatituṣṭiṁ dakṣiṇagaṇḍasthalodgatandānam . romodgataṁ ca

yāturviśeṣasukhadaṁ sadā bhavati . ubhayakaṭasthalasamanirgataṁ ca

viṣayasya vṛddhikaram . śiśirasugandhiparimalaṁ sukhapradaṁ jāyate

bhartuḥ . māṅgalyaṁ śrījananaṁ sobhāgyakaraṁ satvajananaṁ ca .

mādyanti yatra deśe daśāvipākena balakṛtānandāḥ . kariṇastasmin rājā

vardhitavaṁśaḥ sukhaṁ vasati . katakabahulailāparimalaśca

sukhadomado bhavati .

mūtrapurīṣasvedāsṛkvapharasonāditībragandhadharaḥ . aśubhakaro’sau

narapatiyātṝṇāñjāyate madaḥ . jāyante ye bhāvā rājan!

madakhaṇḍamaṇḍita mukhasya . nāgasya mada viśeṣāstāṁstān

pravakṣyāmi . cālayati durgandhamivāghrāya puṣkaraṁ kṣipati prerayati .

leḍhijihvāgreṇa sṛkvaṇī vighaṭitoṣṭhapuṭaḥ . saṁpīḍya puṣukarāgreṇa

cāṅguliṁ niḥśvasaccādhovadanaḥ . tiryakprekṣī bhavati mīlitākṣaḥ

kṣaṇaṁ sthitvā . tiryak cālitavadanamaṅgulyā puṣkaraprakampena .

kiñcitsamunnatāsyaḥ karṇakaṇḍūyanaṁ kurute . kiñcicca darśayitvā

meḍhraṁnāśayati kīśakṛnmūtram . hṛṣṭaḥ krīḍati parivartitānano

bandhanastambha kṛtamatsaraḥ . pradhāvati saṁveṣṭya karaṁ

viṣāṇamudyamya garjati salilapūritajaladharagambhīranādena .

unnāmitāgrahastaḥ svacchandaṅgacchatikvāpi . gurumakṣikaśva bhavati

vanatarugahanonmūlanānurataḥ . vāgaṅkuśamukhajātaṁ bādhanaṁ na

sahate hyabhinnasatvoyaḥ . tiryagvikalatvāśca tathā sagajo

gurumakṣikojñeyaḥ . ramate ca pāṁśuvikaraṇakardamāvagāhādyaiḥ .

evaṁvidhasvabhāvo madabhedavaśādgajo bhavati . yo yasminneva ṛtau

gṛhṇāti madambhataṅgajaḥ sukhadam . sa ca tasminneva punaḥ

prabhidyate dānayuktaśca . iti madavṛddhiviśeṣāḥ kathitāstava bhūtaleśa!

tattvena . parivartate madoyairhetubhiraśubhaistu tānvakṣye .

prativāraṇābhiyānāddūrādhvagamanātkubhojanāccāpi . bandhanadoṣācca

tathā tṛṣṇākṣutpīḍanāccāpi . śārdūlāditrāsāddāvānalolkāśaniprapatanācca

. (aśaniratra vidyut) . naśyati madogajānāṁ śīghraṁ vartmavighnataśca

tathā . mātāpitṛjairdoṣairmandamadānandabarjitāśca tathā . jāyante

dviradā yairyathā tathā sāmprataṁ vakṣyāmi . mandamadena hi kariṇā

jātaḥ kiñcimmadogajo bhavati . madavirahitena tathā

janitomadavivarjito’styeva . samadena tu yo jātogajo gajendreṇa bhavati

tasya madaḥ . evaṁ madaprakārā mātaṅgānāṁ samuddiṣṭāḥ . śṛṇu

sāmprataṁ nareśvara! madāpasaraṇodgavāni cihnāni . yāni bhavanti

gajānāṁ mandamṛdumadavigalitasamudayānām .

rūkṣacchāyāyuktonimlocitagaṇḍasthalagataśrīḥ . kupyati yebhyaḥ

śaṅkāṅkaroti tebhyo’pi satvasthaḥ . gaṇḍasthalena jighrati kareṇukāṁ

spṛśati naiva hastena . mūtrapurīṣāṇi ca no jighrati vāraṇakṛtāni yāturvā

śanairgacchati . satataṁparimṛṣṭadānarājiparīkīrṇakaṭohasnenātīva

saṅgharṣaṇaṁ kurute . muhurabhinandati nidrāmalaso manasā na

tuṣṭimupayāti . liṅgānyetāni kariṇo madena mucyamānasya jāyante .

pratikuñjarayuddhakṛto balaharṣadaśāvayobhyastvaśubhaḥ . bhavati

madonāgānāṁ tāpādisamudbhavaśca śubhaḥ .

rūpavānmadasampannovindhyaśailasamaprabhaḥ . jāyate satvahīnastu

kuñjaraḥ kena hetunā . kena vā rūpahīno’pi madocchrayavivarjitaḥ .

satvavān jāyate nāgo etadākhyātumarhasi iti nahuṣapuṣṭo vṛhaspati

ruvāca . yathā jātakayogena jantūnāṁ ca śubhāśubham . tathā

bandhanakālotthaṅgajānāmapi jāyate . susagnāvasthitaiḥ saumyagrahaiḥ

pīḍāvivarjitaiḥ . bandhanaṁ yasya jāyeta sa bhavet satvavān gajaḥ .

strīnakṣatreṣu gṛhyante ye gajāḥ krūradṛṣṭibhiḥ . ye cālokitanakṣatrāste

bhavanti bhayākulāḥ . uktañca śambhunā mṛgajātayī’pi hi śūrā bhavanti

madhupiṅgalalocanāḥ snigdhāḥ . vṛṣasiṁhamīmavṛścikalagneṣu svīkṛtāḥ

kariṇaḥ . punarnahuṣapraśne guroḥ pratyuktistatraiva . rājan

pañcavidhaṁ caiva gajānāṁ viditaṁ matam . atyarthaṁ prathamaṁ

jñeyaṁ pratyarthaṁ ca tathāparam . anvarthaṁ caiva

gambhīramuttānaṁ pañcamaṁ bhavet . pratodāṅkuśadaṇḍādyai

rvidyādudvejitāni yaḥ . tīvrasaṅkucitaspṛṣṭaḥ sa syādatyarthaveditā .

stokaṁ bahu bahu stokaṁ kṣataṁ manyeta yogajaḥ . vāgaṅku

śādibhirnityaṁ sahi pratyarthaveditā . jānātyaṅkuśatotrādyairyadyathā

tattathaiva hi . kṣataṅkāyabhayairmukto’nvarthajñaḥsa gajobhavet .

aṅkuśādibraṇān rājan! yaścireṇāvagacchati . tīvrānapi sa gambhīravedī

bhavati vāraṇaḥ . romṇāmagraṁ tṛṇenāpi spṛṣṭaṁvetti tu yo gajaḥ .

uttānavedinaṁ tantu gajaṁ viddhi mahābhuja! sarvāṇi veditavyāni

bhadrādīnāṁ bhavanti vai . prakṛtisthasya satataṁ

bhadrasyānvarthaveditā . gambhīraveditā cāpi mandasyaiva prakīrtitā .

uttānaveditā nityaṁ mṛgasyaiva bhavennṛpa! . veditvaṁgajajātīnāṁ

tisṛṇāmapi jāyate . sāmpratañca yathāśāstraṁ kathyate vegalakṣaṇam .

tisṛṇāmapi jātīnā muttamādhamamadhyamam . na cālpaṁ na ca vṛddhaṁ

dvipañcapadasaṁ sthitam . gajotthānasahotthānaṁ naraṁ prāpnoti yena

tu . rayāviṣṭena manasā sa vegauttamomataḥ .

(dvipañcapadasaṁsthitaṁ daśapadasthitaṁ gajotthānasahotthānaṁ

gajadhāvanasamasayadhāvinam) yena vegena gṛhṇāti naraṁ

saptapadāntaram . padānāṁ śatamātrantu sa madhyamajavo bhavet .

yena pañcapadasthaṁ hi naraṁ gṛhṇāti noditaḥ . padānāntu śataṁ

sārdhaṁ sa hīnojava ucyate . śatadvayaṁ vā dhanuṣāṁ

gacchedunnamitānanaḥ . dvātriṁśatā ca mātrābhiḥ sa uktamajavo bhavet

. pañcāśatā ca mātnābhiḥ yāyādyastu śatadvayam . sa

madhyamo’dhamojñeyo mātrāṇāñca śatadvayāt . evaṁ parīkṣyate rājan!

vego vīthiṣu dantinām . ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi gajasya guṇalakṣaṇam .

tatra kalyāṇaśīlaḥ bhārārditovā tṛṣitaḥ kṣīṇaḥ śrāntobubhukṣitaḥ .

rātrau vā divase vāpi nirvikārastu yo bhavet . kalyāṇaśīlaḥ sa jñeyo

samastagajalakṣaṇaiḥ vikāraṁ kurute yastu pīḍyamānaḥkṣudhādibhiḥ .

tamakalyāṇinaṁ rājan gajanduṣṭaṁ prakalpayet . kopo’pi dvividhojñeyaḥ

śiśuścaivāśiśustathā . dvividhasyāpi rājendra! yathāvacchṛṇulakṣaṇam .

udvejito’pi kālena kopaṁ badhnāti nirbharam . kṣipraṁ gṛhṇāti ca

krodhaṁ durnivāraṁ suduḥ saham . śiśukrodhaḥ sa vijñeyo

gajalakṣaṇakovidaiḥ . vāryamāṇo’pi yatnena na śamaṁ yāti muhyati . sa

jñeyastvaśiśukrodho rājan! sa hi raṇapriyaḥ . sāmprataṁ

caivavakṣye’hamāyurlakṣaṇa muttamam . ābhyantaraṁ ca bāhyañca

lakṣaṇaṁ dvividhaṁ smṛtam . ābhyantaraṁ yogasādhyaṁ bāhyaṁ

kiñcicca lakṣyate . tenāntaraṁ parityajya bāhyaṁ lakṣaṇamuttamam .

kṣetrasatvasamāyogā . bhavanti dvādaśaiva hi . ekaṁ hastagataṁ

kṣetraṁ dvitīyaṁ vadanāśritam . tṛtīyañca viṣāṇasthañcaturthaṁ

śirasisthitam . pañcamaṁ nayanasthaṁ ca ṣaṣṭhaṁ karṇāśritaṁ bhavet .

kaṇṭhasthaṁ saptamañcaiva aṣṭamaṅgātrasaṁsthitam . navamaṁ

caraṇe jñeyaṁ śeṣāṅgasthaṁdvipañcamam . ekādaśañca kāntisthaṁ

dvādaśaṁ satvasaṁsthitam . evaṁ dvādaśa kṣetrāṇi mātaṅgānāṁ

bhavanti hi . dvādaśaiva daśājñeyāḥ śeṣāṅgeṣvabhilakṣitāḥ . viṁśottaraṁ

varṣaśatambhadrasyāyuḥ prakīrtitam . avdānyaśītirmandasya catvāriṁśat

mṛgasya ca . miśrasya cāyuṣaḥ saṁkhyā jātibhāvena jāyate .

pradeśajñānatattvajñojātiṁ samupalakṣayet . sarvakṣetraiḥ susaṁpūrṇaḥ

saṁpūrṇāyurgajo bhavet . hīnaiśca hīyate cāyuryathāvadabhidhīyate .

daśāvdānāṁ kṣayaṁ kuryāddhastalakṣaṇavarjitaḥ .

viśaṁtyavdavināśaśca hīne kṣetradvaye bhavet . kṣetratrayāvahīne ca

triṁśadavdaparikṣayaḥ . catvāriṁśatsamāhānirhīne kṣetracatuṣṭaye .

(samā saṁvatraḥ) . pañcāśadavdāhīyante hīne tu kṣetrapañcake .

ṣaṭkṣetrahīnatāyāntu ṣaṣṭivarṣavināśanam . saptatyabdavināśāya

saptakṣetravihīnatā .. aśītiraṣṭabhirhīne varṣāṇāñca vinaśyati .

navatirnavabhirhīnai kṣetrairnāśaṁhi prayāti . daśabhiśca tathā

hīnairnaśyatyavdaśataṁ dhruvam . daśottaraṁ cāvdaśataṁ hīnā cchāyā

vināśayet . viṁśottaraṁ cāvdaśataṁ hīne satve vinaśyati . evaṁ

daśāvdanāśaṁca kṣetraṁ kuryādalakṣaṇam . evamāyuḥkṣayaṁ vidyāt

gajasya gajakovidaḥ . sāmānyalakṣaṇaṁ hyetat jīvitasya parīkṣaṇe .

viśeṣalakṣaṇaṁ yāvad grahalakṣaṇajātitaḥ . evamuddeśamātreṇa

gajāyurlakṣaṇaṁ tava . kathitaṁ sāmprataṁ rājan! doṣaghnaṁ vacmi

lakṣaṇam . pādānāṁ lakṣaṇaṁ samyakdantadoṣaṁ praṇāśayet —yet .

dantayorlakṣaṇaṁ hanti doṣān vāhitthasaṁśritān . vāhitthalakṣaṇaiḥ

samyak netradoṣakṣayo bhavet . netrayorlakṣaṇaṁ hanti

doṣāṁstālusamāśritān . sṛkvadoṣavināśaśca kriyate tālulakṣaṇaiḥ .

sṛkvāṇāṁ lakṣaṇaṁ kuryātsagadadoṣanāśanam . kapolakaṭadoṣaghnāḥ

sagadasthāguṇā nṛpa! . niryāṇavātakumbhānāndoṣaghnaḥ karayorguṇaḥ .

kumbhadoṣavināśāya tayoreva guṇo bhavet . karṇadoṣavināśastu kriyate

kumbhalakṣaṇaiḥ . kaṇṭhadoṣavināśāya karṇalakṣaṇameva hi . āsanasya

hi ye doṣāstān haretkarṇajoguṇaḥ . vaṁśadoṣakṣayakara āsanasya guṇo

bhavet . guṇāghnanti hi vaṁśasya doṣān tatsthalasaṁśritān .

paścimāsanadoṣaghnaṁ lakṣaṇaṁ tatsthalaśritam .

kukṣipecakadoṣaghnaṁ paścimāsanalakṣaṇam . guṇāḥ pecakakukṣisthāḥ

pucchadoṣavināśanāḥ . meḍhradoṣakṣayaṁ kuryāt pucchalakṣaṇameva hi

. mehanasya guṇā hanti doṣāṁścaivāparāśritān . aṇḍakoṣagataṁ

doṣamaparālakṣaṇaṁ haret . nābhidoṣakṣayaṁ kuryādaṇḍakośasya

lakṣaṇam . nābherguṇaiśca hanyante doṣāstanasamāśritāḥ .

uromaṇigatān doṣān nāśayet stanalakṣaṇam . cibukasya hareddoṣān

uromaṇigatoguṇaḥ . yathā doṣakṣayo rājan! lakṣaṇaiḥ kriyate śubhaiḥ .

doṣātireko’pi tathā pradeśaguṇanāśakaḥ . pradeśo’nantarasyaiva

pradeśasyaguṇānvitaḥ . kurute doṣanāśaṁ hi sa doṣoguṇanāśanaḥ .

karakumbhaviṣāṇākṣikarṇalakṣaṇasaṁyutaḥ .

sarvairevāśubhairanyairlakṣaṇaiścāśubhogajaḥ . śūlaṁ

candrāṁśuśubhraṁ syādvakraṁ ca jvalana prabham . vajraṁ

kāñcanasaṅkāśaṅkāladaṇḍaḥsupiṅgalaḥ . eteṣāṁ ca samāyogāddantānāṁ

madhupiṅgatā . yato gajaviṣāṇānāmato madhunibhāḥ śubhāḥ .

bhadrajātergajasyaitanmandasya ca mṛgasya ca .

ghṛtapīpūṣakundenduketakīcchavipañcakam . evaṁ jātitrayasyāpi

sāmānyaṁ śobhanaṁ matam .

kapotadhūmabhasmāsthisarpacchatrakasannibhāḥ

dantayostvaśubhārajan! chāyā pañcavidhā api . adhyardvāratnikaṁ rājan

pramāṇa dantayoḥ śubham .

ata ūrdhaṁ pravakṣyāmi gajānāṁ varṇalakṣaṇam . āhārasya viśeṣeṇa

vātapittakaphaistathā . deśalakṣmaguṇaiścaiva vījayoni vaśena .

grahālokananakṣatralagnarāśivaśena ca . pūrvakarmavaśāccāpi

dhātūnāñca viparyayāt . bhavantikāraṇairebhirvarṇānānāvidhā nṛpa! .

divyasatvāḥ śubhairbhedairvividhāste bhavanti hi .

mindūraśaṅkhaṣaidūryavidyujjāmbūnadaprabhāḥ . indranīlasamānābhā

bhavanti śubhakāntayaḥ . atiśvetāśca raktāśca śukavarhiṇasaprabhāḥ .

ete devagajāḥ sarvemūtale na bhavanti hi . atiśvetāśca raktāśca

śukavarhiṇasaprabhāḥ . daivayogādvane prācye kvacideva bhavanti hi .

vandanīyaśca pūjyo’sau nāsau grāhyonarādhipaiḥ .

śṛṅgārāṅgārabhasmāsthipaṅkamāñjiṣṭhasannibhāḥ . mlāpuṣpasavarṇāśca

gajāstvete’tininditāḥ . evaṁ varṇaviśeṣāstu kathitāstava suvrata! .

gajamekādaśaguṇaṁ vakṣyamāṇaṁ nibodha me .

madhusannibhadantaśca śyāmomadhunibhekṣaṇaḥ . udarepāṇḍu

varṇaśca vaktre ca kamalaprabhaḥ . dvirephasamabālaśca kundendu

sadṛśairnakhaiḥ . sthūlatāromayuktaśca śeṣeṣvaṅgeṣu pītakaḥ . vicitrañca

musvaṁ yasya raktaiḥśvetaiśca vindubhiḥ . sa nāgogajayūthānāṁ

madhye rājā’tra jāyate . taṁ prāpya nṛpatirbhuṅkte sāgarāntaṁ

mahītalam . nīlasavarṇasaṁsthānaḥ sa gajoyūthanāyakaḥ . mukhe made

ca haste ca karṇodaraśirasmuyaḥ . keśaiḥ śubhaiścaḥ valibhirvindubhiḥ

parimaṇḍalaiḥ . savarṇoyo bhaveddantī kailāsaḥ so’bhidhīyate .

ataḥparapravakṣyāmi niḥśvāsasya tu lakṣaṇam . niḥśvāsodvividhojñeyaḥ

śubhaścaivāśubhastathā . śubhaḥ surabhigandhaḥ syāt

pūtigandho’śubhomataḥ . viśeṣeṇa tayoścaiva lakṣaṇaṁ bhūpa! kīrtyate .

sūkṣmatā dīrghatā caiva samatā ca suṁgandhitā . saukumāryaṁ

mṛdutvaṁ ca niśvāsasya tu ṣaḍguṇāḥ . sthūlatā hrasvatā caiva

durgandhatvaṁ tathoṣṇatā . pāruṣyaṁ viṣamatvañca doṣāścāpi bhavanti

ṣaṭ . daśā ratnipramāṇaṁ ca reṇukaṁ pittalakṣaṇam . yo niśvasiti

dīrghaṁ ca sa dīrghāyurgajo mataḥ . araḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi gajālokita

lakṣaṇam . snigdhaṁ sthiraṁ ca saumyaṁ ca vārijotpullatārakam .

salakṣaṁ pratināgaṁ tu prekṣitaṁ śubhakāraṇam . udvignañcañcalaṁ

dīnamavikāśitatārakam . ūrdhādhaḥ pārśva dṛṣṭañca nirlakṣaṁ ninditaṁ

bhavet . kacānāṁ sāmprataṁ bhedān vakṣyamāṇānnibodha me netrayoḥ

puṭapālisthāḥ kacāḥ śubhaphalāḥ smṛtāḥ . saṁkhyā tasyaiva mānantu

romṇāṁ caiva prakīrtitam . dehacchāyāsavarṇatvaṁ mṛdutvaṁ ca tathā

param . anābilatvaṁ ghanatā namrā ca sphuṭitāgratā . aṁśumattā ca

sūkṣmatvaṁ romṇāṁ sapta guṇā smṛtāḥ . doṣāśca saptasaṁkhyāḥ

syurguṇānāṁ ca viparyayāt . śubhāni śubhakartṛṇi duḥkhadānyaśubhāni

ca . ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi lakṣaṇaṁ pakṣmasaṁśrayam . bāhyottānāni

rūkṣāṇi dīrghāṇyā yatanāni ca . mṛdūni piṅgavarṇāni pakṣmāṇi kariṇaḥ

sadā . snigdha cchāyāni kṛṣṇāni samāni ca dṛḍhāni ca . ayanāni macchi

drāṇi pakṣmāṇyatiśubhāni ca . gajānāṁ svāminaḥ saukhyaṁ kurvanti

ramaṇīyatām . dṛḍhāḥ snigdhāgralambāśca suvṛntāśca cchadaprabhāḥ .

tālavṛntasamākārā bālā bharturjaya pradāḥ . śunaḥpucchasamā rūkṣāḥ

kapilāḥ sphuṭitāstathā . ghanatvātiśayopetāḥ suvṛttāstvatininditāḥ .

bhartrārohigajānāntu nityodvegakarāstu te . ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi

keśānāmapi lakṣaṇam . abhinnā ṛjavaḥ snigdhā ghanā madhukaraprabhāḥ

. keśā vāraṇanāthasya kṣemavṛddhikarā matāḥ . rūkṣāstu niṣṭhurāḥ

piṅgāḥ sphuṭitāśca jugupsitāḥ . kurvanti dantināṁ nityaṁ svasya

nāthasya cāśubham . pakṣmavālakeśaromṇāṁ lakṣaṇaṁ kathitaṁ mayā .

phaṇimārjāramaṇḍūkaśṛgālaiśca samaprabham . vānarasya samaṁ caiva

mukhaṁ nāgasya ninditam . snigdhānyāpūrṇagaṇḍāni girikūṭanibhāni ca .

āpūrṇamegharūpāṇi pūjitāni mukhāni cai . madahīnaṁ kṛśaṁ hrasvaṁ

bāhitthaniḥprabhaṁ tathā . varāhalocanākrāntamadṛṣṭacibukaṁ tathā .

lalāṭataṭaparyantagartākṛtibhiranvitam . sagadaṁ hīnatāyuktaṁ mukhaṁ

nāgasya ninditam . mukhasya lakṣaṇaṁ samyak kathitaṁ tava suvrata! .

ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi mātaṅgagatilakṣaṇam . samā ca laghupādā ca

vege’pyatiśubhā matā . dīrghakramā sukhotkṣiptā gātrasaṁvarahāriṇī .

śubhalakṣaṇasaṁyuktā puruṣasya vakasya ca . mātaṅgavṛṣasiṁhānāṁ

gatirmukhyā śubhā matā . kleśacālitagātrā yā viṣamā sulaghukramā .

vege’pi mandasañcārāviśeṣāndolitāsanā . mṛgasya kṛkalāsasya

jambūkasya kharasya ca . gamanena samā yā, sā śubhā no dantināṅgatiḥ

. kathitaṁ tava rājendra! gajānāṁ gatilakṣaṇam . sthitānāñca yathāyīgaṁ

sāmprataṁ lakṣaṇaṁ śṛṇu . pañcasthitasaptasthita navasthita

dvādaśasthitāścaiva . puṇyavatāṁ jāyante rājñāṁ girisannibhāḥ kari ṇaḥ .

lakṣaṇasahitaiḥ snigdhaiḥ karakumbhaviṣāṇakarṇanayanaiśca . saṁyukto

bhavati gajo vasudaḥ pañcasthito nāgaḥ . (vasudaḥdhanadaḥ)

pariṇāhāyāmocchrayabalavikramadhairyakāntisampannaḥ . bhartuḥ

pratāpajanano jñeyaḥ saptasthito hastī .

utsāhavegasāhasamadasatvagurutvadakṣatāyuktaḥ . karadantakarmasu

kuśalonavasthitaḥ karī bhavati . buddhirmedhā satvaṁ yatnaḥkumbhau

tathā’kṣiṇī hṛdayam . romāṇi cchavipādāḥ tathāsanaṁ pṛṣṭhavaṁśaśca .

dvādaśa caitāni sadā sthitāni dṛśyante yasya nāgasya . sa

dvādaśasthitovai bhavati gajaḥ sarvasaukhyakaraḥ . sañcāra

sthitabhedāḥ kathitā guṇasaṁśrayā gajendrāṇām . divyādhamasatvānāṁ

lakṣaṇamiha sāmprataṁ vakṣye . nihatadvipadacatuṣpadakuṇapānna

spṛśati ca na yo mṛhṇāti . na ca jighrati bhūtrādīn sa vāraṇodivyasatvastu

. dattañca yo’tti māṁsa satvānāṁ sarvaṁ tu lobhena . jighrati

mūtrapurīṣāṇi piśācasatvaḥ sa vijñeyaḥ . evaṁ satvaparīkṣā kriyate

naranātha! vāraṇendrāṇām . svaralakṣaṇamidānīmaśubhaṁ śubhañca

vakṣyāmi . sthānānyaṣṭau nṛpate! bhavanti śabdasya vāraṇendrāṇām .

tālvoṣṭhaśirauraḥkarajihvāmūlaṁ galakapolau ca .

gambhīrasaumyahṛṣṭāstabdhāśramīritāstathā snigdhāḥ . nādāḥ

śubhāḥnarādhipa! ṣaḍevakathitā gajendrāṇām . catvārastvaśubhā

raudrābhayaśokasaṅgamotpannāḥ . evaṁ śubhāśubhāśca

daśaprakārāḥsvarāḥsvarā jñeyāḥ . anye’pi

galavaktragānilāsphālanodbhavā bahavaḥ . śabdābhavanti kariṇāṁ

śubhāśubhaṁ na tairbhavati .

nimnocitacivukāyitavirukṣitakūjitakharoṣṭranādanibhāḥ .

vāyasajambūkakapikāṣṭhabhaṅgasadṛśāravāstvaśubhāḥ . jñeyāni śubhāni

sadā mṛdaṅgajīmūtadundubhinibhāni . pātāyitagarjitahasitāni vṛṁhitāni

nāgānām . pātāyitañca tālvoṣṭhasambhavaṁgarjitakaṁ caiva .

jihvāsamudbhavaṁ ca phenāyitamityabhikhyātam . hasitaṁ

kapolajanitaṁ puṣkaravivarodbhavañca nāgānām . bhavati

dhanaghānyavāhanabhūlābhakaraṁ narendrasya . hastena

mṛdaṅgaravaṁ tu karṇābhyāṁ dundubhisvanañcaiva . darduraravaṁ tu

pecakena karoti yo’sau jayakaraḥ . sarvasthānasamutthā śabdā

naranātha! vāraṇendrāṇām . ācāryaiḥ sarvairvṛṁhitasaṁjñāśca ravāḥ

śubhā jñeyāḥ . ete ca jayaparājayakathanasamarthā bhavanti bhūpānām .

garhitaśubhapradeśasthānāṅgaparivardhitā nādāḥ .

śuṣkatṛṇakāṣṭhakaṇṭakavalmīkāsthiśmaśānaduṣṭāsu . pāṣāṇāṅgārādiṣu

bhūmiṣu yadi saṁsthitāḥ kariṇaḥ . vṛṁhanti

hīnalakṣaṇametadbhartustadā’sukhaṁ bhavati . prabhūtamṛdaṅgaravaṁ

tu yadi vṛṁhantyānandapūritāḥ kariṇaḥ . prasthānaṁ bhavati tadā

narādhipasya vijayastadā rājan .! sabhāmadhye ca yadā vṛṁ° hanti

śārdūlavat gajāhraṣṭāḥ . bhavati sasainyasya tadāvijayaḥ saṁkhye

narendrasya . (saṁkhyaṁ saṁgrāmaḥ) kalahaṁsanāda madhuraṁ

kiñcidivotkṣiptapuṣkarastu yadā . vṛṁhati sadā ca hastī tadāpi

jayobhavedbhartuḥ . mukhavivarakapīlagataṁvṛṁhatyasakṛt gajo yadā

hṛṣṭaḥ . madhuraṅgajahasitañca jayapradaṁ bhavati bhūpānām . trīn

vārān krauñcaravaṁ haṁsaravaṁ vṛhitaṁ yadā kurute . etadapi

nāgahasitañjayapradambhavati bhūpānām . garjati ghanavat satataṁ

yadi vāraṇaḥ prahṛmanāḥ

mukharandhuniviṣṭakarastadā’rivijayo’bhavedbhartuḥ . ghanaiva

gṛhītasalilaṁ sasītkaraṁ vṛṁhitaṁ yadā kurute . bhavati tadā

vāraṇanāthasya bhavati śatrunāśaḥ khalveva . kathitānye tāni mayā

śubhāni gajavṛṁhitāni naranātha! . aśubhāni ca nāgānāmataḥparaṁ

pravakṣmāmi . śaṅkācālitanayanovarāha ghuritaniḥsvanaṁ kurute .

tatpratibalasya nūnam tadā kṣayo bhavati . bhūpāla! veṣṭitabhūtalahasto

nadati yadā dharaṇiprakampanādasamam . narapatirāṣṭravināśo mabati

tadā śatrusainyakṛtaḥ . madamuditakharatarasadṛśaṁ niḥsvanaṁ yadi

karī kurute . janayati vijayavināśāt purarāṣṭrapīḍanaṁ ca tadā .

balibhvagnisvana sadṛśaṁ yadi vā samutphālya ca hastam .

vāmāndolitacaraṇoyadā karī vṛṁhati saniḥśvāsam . ālānagataḥ kurute

tadā baddhoyātāvairibhiḥpāśaiḥ . evaṁ prakṛtisthāyadi mataṅgajā

vṛṁhitāni kurvanti . ātyantikāni rājñāṁ caiva bhavanti nānyāni . yadi

ripugajābhimukho nivāyyamāṇo’pi yāti rabhasena . viṁśatipadāni

nāgastatrāpi jayobhavatyeva . amadogṛhṇāti madaṁ durgandhamadaśca

surabhimadam . duṣṭagajānāṁ prathamandulakṣaṇamevaṁ sakalam .

hrasvatanurmaṇivadano hi mahāśirāstabdhakarṇayugalaśca .

nātisthūlo’sisavarṇastabdhāni ca gātra vadanaromāṇi . vyāsaḥ sa bhavati

hastī duṣṭātmā duṣṭaśīlaśca . sthūlākṣipāṇḍurūkṣo

dīrghaviṣāṇonāmitamukhaśrīḥ . pṛthupādaḥśyāvanasvo

vakrohanupuṭadaṇḍena . visṛtakukṣila mvodaraśca kṛṣṇovarāhanayanaśca

. jñeyovakīlanāmā khyāto’yaṁ sarvadoṣakaraḥ . atihrasvāparagātro

vṛhanmukhaḥ kākakṛṣṇanayanaśca .

sthūlatarādhomukhadantadīnamuśalasphuṭita vahirnakhapādaḥ .

sthūlanakhaḥsthūlapuṣkarakaraśca vāmana saṁjño gajādhamo

duṣṭaśīlaśca . viṣāṇe cātidṛḍhe hrasve parimaṇḍalau tathā karṇau .

vadanañca māṁsalaṁ syādadhogatasthūlanayanañca .

samamāṁsalatvayukto hrasvo hrasvāṅguliḥ karo yasya . nāmnā ca

viśvarūpamukha iti khyāto duṣṭamātaṅgaḥ . karakarṇa

śirābāladhiviṣāṇagātrāṇi yasya hīnāni . ādagdhabho’tivāmanāṅgaḥ

pāpātmā sa svāmināśakaraḥ . śayanādutthāya balāddvāvapi pādau

karvati kṛcchreṇa . pratyuṣasi gacchati punaḥ kāpi

samupasthāpitamukhaśca . anibhṛtagātrastiṣṭhedvicalati tasyānanaṁ ca

karṇābhyām . sa jñeyo vātakaraḥ pāpātmā sarvapāpakaraḥ . yasya ca

kilālpaṁ meḍhraṁ hrasvaṁ hrasvāṅgulistanurhrasvā . atinimnañca

bāhitthaṁ karṇau ca tanutvacau hrasvau . gātrāparañca dīrghaṁ

nakhāśca janitāntarāstathā . sarvāṇi ca kākābhapakṣmaromāṇi ca

vidagdhāni . udarañcākṛṣṇa syāt grīvā tanvāyatā ca vakrā ca .

vaṁśikanāmā mato’sau duṣṭagajovarjanīyaśca . yasya karālau daśanau

sthūlau mātrāntarantathā hrakham .

mastiṣkaśuklavarṇaḥkaṣijambukalocano’tivikṛtatanuḥ . pāpātmāyaṁ hastī

rājñā heyaḥ prayatnena . divasamapi yatra tiṣṭhati taṁ deśaṁ dahati

yāvakaprakhyaḥ . rājñā vindhyāvane vā pararāṣṭre vā sa moktavyaḥ .

atikharaparighatanurnakulacchāyastanūruhaistabdhaiḥ . yo hastī pātāraṁ

sa pātayitvā vināśayati . dhanvāsadṛśa mukhoyaḥ karṇakacāyasya

karkaśārūkṣāḥ . kṛṣṇārūkṣātvayo’sau bharturvipadeva mātaṅgaḥ .

romabhiradhomukhagataiḥ kākākṣo dīrghavaktra śca .

sthirahrasvakarṇayugalaḥ sa rākṣasohastī rūpeṇa . tiryak

prekṣaṇaniratodurgandhaḥ kākakumbhavadanaśca . bhūtrapuroṣaghrāṇe

samutsuko bhavati caṇḍālaḥ . kumbhau yasya viśālau vikṣipta

sthūlatārake ca netre . tanvāyataṁ trikaṁ syāt bālaghibālāstu

bahurūprāḥ . raktau pecakakośau meḍhroparisaṁsthitodarañca mahat .

calapakṣmalastu hastī sa bhavati nāmnā mahāduṣṭaḥ . aṅgaṁ prasārya

vadanaṁ vidhūya cādhoraṇaṁ nipātayati . sa jale sthale ca nāgo

vibajaṁnīyaḥ prayatnena . hrasvakarāṅgulibālatanu

daśanaścālpāyāmagātraśca . matkuṇajātiḥ sa gajaḥ suduṣṭaśīlaśca

ruṣṭaśca . kālanakho harivarṇoharyakṣo hrakhabāla dhiścaiva .

bahupakṣmā durgandhirmaṇisannibhatālukairūkṣaiḥ .

atipiṅgalakarṇacūloromaśahasto varāhanayanaśca .

tanunakhasirālakṛṣṇairnakhāntarairduṣṭacaraṇaiśca . vikhuronāma

gajo’sau svāṅgaiḥ sarvatra karkaśojānvoḥ . bahupāpakarmayukto

vyālānāmagraṇīścāyam . rūkṣobāhitthabhāgo viṣamau dantau ca yasya

nāgasya . dhūmaśikheva cchāyā sa nindito varjanīyaśca . dantau

cātihrasvau sthūlau rūkṣau ca māṁsalo hastaḥ . cibukaṁ māṁsaviśuṣka

sthūlatare tārake yasya . sthūlamukho duṣṭātmā nāsau sāṁgrāmiko

bhaveddviradaḥ . ati duṣṭakarnanirato bhayāluko varjanīyaśca . kṛṣṇā

rūkṣā cchāyā vāyasajaṅghā ca dṛśyate yasya . mūtodanañca kurute

niḥśaṅkaṁ yaḥ karāgreṇa . niḥśeṣaṁ śabdāṁśca karoti yaḥ

sahastaniṣyeṣam . pariharaṇīyo rājñāyāne raṇe sa mahatā prayatnena .

atīvaviralapasmā dhyānaparaḥ śabdakaraṇanirataśca . dviguṇīkṛtya

karāgrantudati ca bhūtalantu nityam . vāmena ca likhaṁti mahīmpādena

kuñcitāgreṇa . jarjaravirūpakarṇaḥ pāpātmā nindito hastī .

ānāhāyāmocchrayasatvamukto mahāsirālaviḍaḥ . hrasvāṅgulibālakaro

hrasvāparagātrakarṇaśca . eṣo’pi vāmanaḥsyādyadyapi

bhavedyuddhapriyo’sau dviradaḥ . rājñā tathāpi lakṣaṇavivarjito

varjanīyaśca . sthūlamukhahastakarṇovihīnajaghamāparastanūrūkṣaḥ .

mahatā meḍhreṇa yutonaṣṭamadaḥ kośamahāṁśca .

mandālokananiratomahāśirāḥ pṛthuviṣāṇanayanaśca . hastī

napuṁsako’sau vivarjanīyaśca saṁgrāme . alpāyuṣo bhavanti hi

saṅkālajihvoṣṭhatālukānāgāḥ . narapatibhiste satataṁ vivarjanīyāḥ

prayatnena! āyāmaparihīnaṁ samanāhocchrāyamukhena namitam .

ucchritavaktraṁ kubjaṁviṣamakumbhaṁ kukkurasamānahīnahastaṁ ca .

evaṁbhūtaṁ tu gajaṁ rājā dūreṇa varjayenmatimān . gṛhṇāti

mandabudviryastasya kulakṣayo bhavati . lakṣaṇayukto’pi gajo

dvāviṁśatyekaviṁśatinakhaśca . ekonaviṁśatinasvaḥ saptadaśanakhaśca

yo bhavati . ṣoḍaśa pañcadaśa vā nakhān dhatteyukto vā caturdaśabhiḥ .

ekādaśatrayodaśanavadaśabhirdvidaśanakhaiścaiva .

saṁyuktastvaśubhakaraḥ saptāṣṭābhiśca pāpanakhaiḥ .

dviradāścāṣṭādaśanakhāḥ viṁśatinakhayuktāśca śubhāḥ . kurute

svāmivināśaṁ dvāviṁśatinakhoyaśca . ekonaviṁśatinakho

yuvarājavināśaṁ kurute . saptadaśanakhastu gajo narapatipātra vināśane

samarthaḥ . ṣoḍaśanakhamātaṅgonāyakanāśaṁ dhruvaṁ kurute .

pañcadaśanakhaśca yo’sau senāpatinidhanakṛdgajo bhavati . kurute

caturdaśanakhovyādhiṁ puravāsināṁ hastī . trayodaśanakho

rāṣṭravittavināśaṅkaroti bhūpasya . dvādaśanakhastu kurute

padātituragakṣayaṁ saṁkhye . ekādaśanakhayuktī najahānikaro bhavet

sa gajaḥ . puradāhaṁ ca daśanakhaḥ karoti hastī durālokam .

caturaṅgasya balasya nāśavantu navanakho gajaḥ kurute . aṣṭanakhaśca

purohita baṁśasamunmūlanasamarthaḥ . saptanakhaḥ pratihāraṁ

nāśayati ca ṣaḍnakho’mātyam . pañcanakho bhaktikaraṁ caturnakho

dvārapālañca . trinakhoviṣayākṣepaṁ dvinakhaścāntaḥ purānubandhañca

. ekanakhonakharahitorāṣṭravināśaṁ dhruvaṁ kurute .

evambhūtanakhāye narapatinā na te gajāgrāhyāḥ .

lākṣamañjiṣṭhābho’tilomaśohīnakarṇakarabālaḥ . hastī vivarjanīyo

hīnanakhaḥ pūtilomā ca . jvalanakṛtaṁ śastrakṛtaṁ durbhikṣakṛtaṁ

mahadbhayaṁ kurute . yasmin deśe vasati nāśayati vana sa duṣṭātmā .

yasya na bhavatodantau jvalanakṛtaṁ durbhikṣakṛtaṁ mahadbhaya

kurute . yasmindeśe sa vasati nāśayati vanaṁ sa duṣṭātmā . yasya na

bhavatī dantau kularūpavato’piṁ garbhadoṣeṇa . sa gajomatkuṇanāmā na

taṁ raṇe yojayedrājā . kuñjaraghaṭāgato’sau harati gajānāṁ balaṁ ca

satyañca . ataeva samarakāle narādhipairvarjanīyaśca .

tanuhrasvadīrghadantohyatisaṅkaṭavakravighaṭitaviṣāṇaḥ .

ekadaśanastvadhomukharadanaśca gajaḥ prabhaṁtyajati . radanavihīno

hastī niḥśeṣalakṣaṇayuto’pi . bhavati na nṛpatiyogyomadajalasaṁsiṁktaṁ

gaṇḍo’pi . dūṣitavirahitadīne satvarahite vivarṇe ca .

niṣprabhakuñjakuhare rājā nārohati sannāhara hite ca .

evambhūtāstyājyāḥ mitranāśakā raṇe kariṇaḥ . akṣibhyāmaśrujalaṁ

nipatati nāgasya yasya nitya hi . nayanavyādhiviyuktasya tasya bhartā

raṇemriyate . vaddhanaśīlāśca nakhā bhartuścaiva saṁbādhanakarāḥ .

jihvānakhamukhamehananayanāni bhavanti yasya kṛṣṇāni . bāhitthacitra

kṛṣṇaḥ sa gajobhartuḥ kṣayaṁ kurute . bāhyāṁsaphalakapīṭhī rājan!

kṛśena pṛṣṭhavaṁśena . vadanena ca kapivadanānukāriṇānindito hastī .

karṇau dantau ca samau na natau bhavatī yasya naranātha! . sa

narādhipabalavināśakaraḥ karījāyate samare . citrau romacitau vā sthūlau

vātipralambitāgrau vā . koṣau koṣavināśaṁ sa karoti nāgaśca bhūpānām .

sitabindubhirvicitraṁśvetaṁ vā yasya jāyate meḍhram . sa gajaḥśakti

vināśaṅkaroti bhūpasya saṁgrāme . chāgasyeva vicitrāṇi yasya dehe

bhavanti romāṇi . sa gajaḥpratigajabalena vihvalo nijabalaṁ dahati .

suptotthitasya vadanāt yasya gajendrasya galati rudhirajālam .

jvalanakaṇaṁ muñcati śaśvadasau bhartṛnāśakaraḥ . iti kathitaṁ tava

nṛpate! duṣṭamātaṅgalakṣaṇaṁ samyak . pāpakariṇyālakṣaṇamataḥ

paraṁ saṁpravakṣyāmi . yallakṣaṇaṁ mayoktambhadrādīnāṁ śubhaṁ ca

duṣṭaṁ ca . tatkariṇīṣvapi yojyaṁ jātivibhāgena ca yuktāsu . sulakṣaṇena

lalitāni kareṇukānāmaṅgāni bhavanti . yuvatisadṛśāna puruśocitāni ca

tathā pīnānyaṅgāni kareṇūnām . gajasaṁsthānā kariṇī nirmatadantā

supīnakāyā ca . sthūlāyatā ca satataṁ prabhūtadayā matāca kariṇīnām .

prācyavanasamudbhūtāḥ prāyeṇa lakṣaṇayutā bhavanti kariṇyaḥ .

sulakṣaṇeṣu ca cchāyā lakṣaṇaṁ pradhānaṁ tacca pañcavidhaṁ bhavati .

pṛthivyaptejovāyvākāśātmakam . tatra pṛthivyapteja ātmakaṁ praśasta

vāyvākāśātmakamapraśastam . krameṇa cchāyābhidhīyate

balopacayapaśena samutapadyate . tasyaiva dehoddyotajananī sthirā

prabhā’bhidhīyate . chāyāphalasya dviguṇapalasampādanasamarthā

prabhā bhavati . chāyā dehasamāśritāḥ sthiraprabhāvā’sthirā cchāyā

yalopacayavaśena sumutpadyate . narendrasyaivodyogakāle

śubhakarmaphalasūcanārthaṁ gajasya prabhā prakaṭībhavatyeva . evaṁ

chāyāgato bhedo’vagantavyaḥ . sāmprataṁ chāyārūpamabhidhīyate .

snigdhā gambhīrarūpā pārthivī cchāyā bhavati . snigdhājībhūtasannibhā

ca salilasambhūtā, snigdhā raktā ca tāmrā ca tejasī cchāyā . trayaṁ

caitallakṣaṇaṁśubhamaśubhalakṣaṇāni gajasya stambhayitvā

sukhapradaṁ bhavati . athāśubhā kathyate niḥpramā paruṣā rūkṣā

bhasmanākulavarṇā ca vāṣavī . rūkṣā tanvīkṛṣṇādivividhavarṇā

ākāśātmikā . itthaṁ chyādvayamati garhitam gajalakṣaṇāni

tiraskatyāśubhapradambhavatyanena prakāreṇa cchāyālakṣaṇamuttamaṁ

bhavati . vikaṭahrasvabālavṛddhakṛśāṅgahīnāṅgeṣu

vyādhipīḍitavikalāṅgeṣu gajeṣu nārohati rājā bhṛtyāścaiteṣvārohantīti .

yādṛśaṁ ca samarakāle mātaṅgaṁ rājā samārohati tādṛśasya

lakṣaṇamabhidhīyate . balaṁ kaṇṭhai sthitaṁ nityaṁ kuñjarāṇāṁ

nareśvara! . ataḥsaṁpūrṇakaṇṭhastu śikhipiṅgalalocanaḥ .

ghanamāṁsacitāṁsastu diśo’vaghrāṇatatparaḥ . varāhajaghanaścaiva

suviṣāṇovarānanaḥ . supratiṣṭhitapādastu yaḥ syādagurumakṣikaḥ .

prājāpatyogajohyeṣa saṁgrāmārhaḥ prakīrtitaḥ . madhupiṅgaladantoyaḥ

kikivāpītakacchabiḥ . romāṇi caiva rūpāṇi mukha ca kamalaprabham .

raktotpaladalacchāye sūkṣme tīkṣṇe ca locane . aindrogajastu

vijñeyoripuvṛndavināśanaḥ . tāmratālukajihvoṣṭhasujātaniviḍāparaḥ .

pīnonnataśarīrastu raktakokanadacchaviḥ . āyatena tu dantena kareṇa

mukhaśobhinā . pīyūṣapiṅgadanto hi gajaḥkauvera ucyate .

taruṇāmbudasaṁkārśīghṛtaprabhaviṣāṇabhṛt . saṁpūrṇakaṇṭhapādastu

saṁpūrṇasamamastakaḥ . mṛdaṅgadhvanigambhāranādapūritadiṅmukhaḥ

. āyatena ca hastena sīkarotkiraṇapriyaḥ . vāruṇo’yaṁ gajorājan

saṁgrāmeṣvatipūjitaḥ . kaṇṭhastrivalisaṁyuktaḥ saṁpūrṇoyasya dṛśyate .

locane tāmbapiṅge ca dantau ketakasaprabhau . pādau ca valinau yasya

pīnagātrasamāṁsalau . pṛthulau vinducitrau ca karṇau cātāsrapallavau .

aiśāno’yaṅgajo rājan! raṇakarmaṇi yujyate . tālunyurasi vaktre ca

pakṣayorubhayorapi . ātāmrā yasya dṛśyeta cchāyā mṛdutanūruhā . asau

saumyastu vijñeyaḥ kuñjaraḥ samarocitaḥ . arciḥpiṅgala romā yaḥ

keśaiśca śvetapiṅgalaḥ . piṅgalākṣiviṣāṇaśca rakta puṣkaratālukaḥ .

āgneyaḥ sa gajojñeyastejasāgnisamaprabhaḥ . rājñā budvimatā nityaṁ

dhāryaḥ samarakarmaṇi . kṛṣṇavarṇa yutāgrāṇi mukhaśrotāṁsi locane .

nirghūṁmāgnisamacchāye bhūlagnaśca karastathā . kāyaśca

pīnanāsaḥsyādvege vāyusamaḥ śubhaḥ . rājanu . vāyavyamicchanti

taṅgajaṁ śāstrakovidāḥ . saṁkhye niyuktaśca gajonāśayedripuvāhinīm .

niraṅkuśatvaṁ caṇḍatvaṁ tasya doṣadvayaṁ bhavet . niraṅkuśatvaṁ

śamayet prayogāśvāsanādibhiḥ . caṇḍatvaṁ ca tathā nityaṁ

sukumārakriyādibhiḥ . romāṇyañjanarūpāṇi nakhāḥ śaṅkhasamaprabhāḥ .

nistriṁśavimalacchāyaḥ sa bhavedvaiṣṇavogajaḥ . sa vairiṇaṁ jayed

rājan! ripusainyavimardanaḥ . kumbhavaktraḥ kaṭau yasya

nistriśaghanasaṁnibhau . bindubhiścitri taṁ yasya sa vicitraśravo gajaḥ .

tena saṁgrāmakarmāṇi kurute yo narādhipaḥ! . nityaṁ cārijayaṁ tena sa

rājā phalamaśnute . sudanto dīrghahastaśca vṛhadaṅgulipuṣkaraḥ .

ghanamāṁsaśarīraśca kūrmākārohi sattama! . sāṁgrāmikonajohyeṣa

jīvatyapi samāśatam . saṁgrāmavijayī nityaṁ pratāpajananakṣamaḥ .

mahāśirā mahākāyo mahāmeḍhro mahākaraḥ . mahādantodaraścaiva

mahānāgovarāsanaḥ . mahānetro mahauṣṭhaśca mahākarṇomahāmukhaḥ

. mahāmado mahākaṇṭho bhavetsāṁgrāmikogajaḥ . yadbhadralakṣaṇaṁ

pūrvamuktaṁ nṛpa! tacchubhameva hi . mandasyāpi hi śastaṁ

syadāddvāvetau ca mahāgajau . saṁpūrṇalakṣaṇopeto na bhavecca

mahītale . anayoreva bhedāstu nāgānāṁ samudāhṛtāḥ . sāṁgrāmikā

dvipā rajān! śubhalakṣaṇalakṣitāḥ . kathitāstava tattvena

rājasaukhyakarāgajāḥ . ābhiṣecanikagajalakṣaṇaṁ tatraiva .

pīnamāṁsacitāṁsaśca kūrmākāranakhastathā . samavacitasāṁsastu

suvṛttaḥ kalpanāparaḥ . chānakukṣiḥ supārśvaśca romānāhasamanvitaḥ .

jvalanojjvalanetrastu suviṣāṇo mahākaraḥ . saṁpūrṇacibukaścaiva

kramāyāmorayānvitaḥ . balasatvasamāyuktaḥ snigdhacchavimanoramaḥ .

sāṁgrāmiko bhaveṣṭrājña ābhiṣecaniko gajaḥ .

tatraiva pālakāvye gajahṛdaye . āyuḥ saviṁśati śataṁ mānaṁ syāt

sāmajanmanām . rājaputra! diśāmyevamāyuṣyādi daśādaśa . lakṣaṇāni

vade teṣāṁ kṣetrāṇyevaṁ viṣāṇinām . lakṣaṇālakṣaṇaṁ

jñeyamāyuṣyādidaśāphalam . kṣetrāṇi hastauṣṭhamukhaṁ dantau śīrṣaṁ

ca cakṣuṣī . karṇau grīvā ca gātrañca vakṣaḥ kāryasya bhedataḥ .

lakṣaṇaṁ sannikṛṣṭaṁ yadbiprakṛṣṭañca yadbhavet .

matañcitrabalopetaṁ prabhūtañja manīṣibhiḥ . tulye kule vane jātau

pracāre yattu lakṣaṇam . daśāyāñca tadākhyātaṁ ghrabhūtamiti sūribhiḥ

. dakṣiṇandakṣiṇāṅgaṁ ca hastinaḥ puṇyadaṁ matam . tathā vāmaṁ ca

vāmāṅgaṁ hastinīphaladaṁ matam . lakṣaṇaṁ dakṣiṇāṅgotthaṁ phalaṁ

bhūmibhujāṁ matam . mahadvyaktaṁ bhaveyadyacca lakṣaṇaṁ

tanmahāphalam . yadalpamaprakāśañca tadalpaphaladaṁ matam .

madhyamānaphalaṁ mavyaṁ lakṣaṇaṁtu samādiśet . śubhāśubhena

miśreṇa bahutvenādiśet phalam . kadācit śubhada cāsya

gajānāmapyalakṣaṇam . śubhakarmāṇamāsādyarājānamatha vā dvijam .

yathā hi sarvasaritaḥ samudraṁ samupetya hi . svarasena viyujyante

mavanti lavaṇāmbhasaḥ . evamāsādya bhartāraṁ bahulakṣaṇalakṣitam .

bhavanti bādhitānīha durlakṣaṇaphalāni ca . ityupakramya

gajadehasthānavibhāganāmabhedastatraiva darśitaḥ . yathā

viṣāṇayīryastiryaksyādāyatāgro graho’pi saḥ . kivivā ca

grahasyādhaḥkumbhopari ca bimbakaḥ . atha grahoparistho’pi

puraṣkaro’pi bhavettathā . tathā grahoparisthe ca kivivoparibhāgake .

vāhitthopari keśāśca mastakaṁ ca tathā matam . syātāṁ mastakapiṇḍau

ca mastakasthaśca vindukaḥ . tathā vindūparisyātāṁ vitānau

vindupārśvataḥ . tato’ntaravitānaṁ ca pṛṣṭhaṁ tatra vinirdiśet .

vinduvitānayoścāntaḥ purastāt pākilau kila . nīce mastakapiṇḍāddhi

vitānavindupākalaḥ . niryāṇaṁ ca vitānordhvaṁ karṇau vāpi tataḥ kaṭau .

kaṭayoḥ śrotasī vāpi kaṭasvāvastayoradhaḥ . pṛṣṭhataḥ kaṭisaṁdhī ca

gaṇḍau ca kaṭayoradhaḥ . kaṭagaṇḍāntasadbhāge ghāṭasandhī ca

ghāṭake . ghāṭāsandhyupariṣṭācca karṇasandhisamīpage . śravaṇe

gātragaṇḍādhaḥkapolau ca tadantare . romakūrcau ca pādau ca

kapolādhastathā matau . tataḥ sagadasandhī ca sagadāntaramatra ca .

āsagadāt hanvavaghiḥ pradeśaḥ śirasomataḥ .

akṣikūṭābuparyakṣāvubhābupari vai tayoḥ . guhevākṣā’dharaḥ syāttu

netrasrāvau tayoradhaḥ . apāṅgāvakṣibāhye ca tatsandhī cākṣipṛṣṭhataḥ .

pakṣmaṇormaṇḍale cātha tatsandhī vartmamaṇḍalau . vartmamaṇḍala

sandhī ca tataśca śvetamaṇḍale . śvetamaṇḍalasandhī ca tataḥ kṛṣṇe ca

maṇḍale . tatsandhī ca tataḥ kṛṣṇe satsandhī vartmamaṇḍale . tayorapi

tathā sandhī prāgbhāge cakṣuṣorapi . kanīnike samāmnāte sandhī tatra

tathānayoḥ . ityakṣigatadeśānāṁ samuddeśo bhavediha . kila vittau ca

karṇau ca karṇayoścūlikā tataḥ . tadadhaḥ karṇapippalyau balike dve

pradeśage . karṇamastakasandhī ca paścāt karṇāpavartayaḥ . tadantaśca

samasthānāvudghātau parikīrtitau . karṇacūlikayoragre piṅgalākhyau ca

bhāṣitau . purastāt karṇapi palyāḥ karṇasaṁveśacarmaṇī . karṇāntaḥ

karṇanāḍyau ca lambetāṁ tasya bhāgataḥ . tayārvīthiḥkavandhaśca

saśaṅkhamadhyakarṇayoḥ . karṇasandhyoradhastācca

tathādhaḥsandhisaṁjñitau . tadadhaḥkarṇapālyau ca prāk

karṇoparitastayoḥ . nāḍīpārśvagatau cātra madhyakarṇau tayoradhaḥ .

adhaḥkarṇau samākhyātau bahiḥkarṇāpavartayoḥ . pārśvakarṇau

bahiḥkarṇau karṇayośca kramād bahiḥ . antarāntarakarṇau ca

paryantakarṇapāśayoḥ . adhastācceti bhāgāḥ syuḥ karṇayoḥ kariṇo’pi ca .

grīvāyāḥ prāgbhavobhāgo grīvā sandhistatastathā . grīvāpṛṣṭhaṁ

tatasyācca madhye tacca kṛkāṭikā . grīvāpṛṣṭhe

tathādhastādgalamāhurdvipasya ca . adhaḥkaṇṭhastayoścordhaṁ manye

te galakaṇṭhayoḥ . dhamanyau kaṇṭhapārśve ca tayoścābalipiṇḍikā .

galasya pārśvayīrūrdhvaṁ dardurau cātra nirdiśet . guhe

manyoparisyātāmupariṣṭāttayostathā . kivikau ca tathā coktau

paścādupari caitayoḥ . pārṣṇighātau ca saṁkhyātau pārṣṇighātāntare

tathā . utsaṅgāvupari syātāṁ skandhādūrdhaṁ tathānayoḥ . tanmadhye

paṇavaścordhvamiti grīvāṁśasaṁgrahaḥ . (hastipakena pārṣṇibhyāṁ yau

deśau hanyete tau pārṣṇighātau) gātramātramāyataṁ ca

bhavedāsanamāditaḥ . tatpārśvayoḥ pratīkāśau tāvaṁsau ca tayoradhaḥ .

tadadhaḥpratyagaṁsau ca tathaivāṁsaphale tathā . tadadhastāttatobāhū

tatobāhūttaraṁ tathā . arvāgatra guhe tatra bāhupṛṣṭhodbhave api .

apāre ca tadūrdhvaṁ ca tayīstadbhāvikau tathā .

pālyāvathāṅgādūrdhañca tayorāyāmapṛṣṭhataḥ .

pālyantāṅgapurastāccabhujayoruditau yavau . yavabhāgopari tathā

purastāt phalakocchritau . piṇḍikādhaśca vemākhyau viśoṣau

yavayoradhaḥ . utsaṅgau ca viśoṣādhaḥ prahau cāpi tayoradhaḥ .

tatsandhī ca tataḥ parvasandhānau tadadhomatau . tadadhaḥ pālipādau

vai kūrcau cānu tayoradhaḥ . tadadhonakhakūrcāśca tato nakhaśikhā

daśa . puraḥpuronakhau nāmnā sanakhau caiva vistṛtau . tatpaścāttu

nakhagrīvā viśoṣāḥ pārśvatonatāḥ . antaḥpārśvabahiḥpārśve syātāṁ

pārśvanakheṣu ca . kavāsa rājayaścātra pādanāhāvikāstathā . talasandhī

tataḥ syātāṁ tale ca tadanantaram . talapradeśapuratastatparā

nakhabudhnataḥ . talakarṣau tataḥ paścāt talaprahau tataḥparau .

talayorantaraṁ caiva hṛdaye ca karīrake . kiṁvinorājayaśceti

talasadbhāvikā api . palahastau tataḥ syātāmantarbāhū tato’ntare .

bahirbāhū bahiścordhvaṁ gātra sarvaṁ tato’pi ca . kakṣau gātra

prahordhañca kakṣayorantaraṁ tataḥ . iti pradeśā gaditā gajānāṁ

gātragocarāḥ . kaṇṭhasyāntarmaṇiḥ pūrvaṁ grīvāparva samāśrayaḥ .

uromaṇiḥ samāmnātastataḥ syādurasaḥ sthitiḥ . yā’dhobhā pārśvagā

tatra gātrasandhisamāśritā . āvartamaṇi rapyatra vikṣo bhāsvarasaṅgataḥ

. tataḥ sandhikarastu syāttasyādhaḥ stanayoḥ puraḥ . mātrayorantaraṁ

cāpi caturakṣāntaraṁ bhavet . adhaḥstanau ca stanayorantare cātha

cūcuke . stanāntau stanakūrcau ca kṣīrikau cāpi kūrcake .

caturakṣāntarālaṁ ca bhave ccūcukayoradhaḥ . stanayorapyadhastācca

purastāt stanayorbhavet . hṛdayaṁ cāsya pārśvasthāvāyāmau ca

bahistayoḥ . syātāmāyāmakāṇḍau ca tadaghovivaśau tataḥ . tataḥ

kroḍaṁ padādhastāt paścāccāyāmakāṇḍayoḥ . randhre cāparavastiśca

stanayorapyanantaram . jaṭhare nābhirityete pradeśāḥ kila vakṣasaḥ .

āparāṅghriparaḥśephoretaḥsrāvāvaghiḥ smṛtaḥ . tato’ṇḍakoṣasandhiḥ

syāt koṣasandhiśca śephataḥ . kramānmehanamatra syāt meḍhrasaṁjño

bhavedapi . ānirgamāttathā tasya bāhupārśvagatau matau . agratastatra

kakudaṁ tasyāśrī pārśvayorapi . mehanasya puraḥsroto vaṅkṣaṇau

koṣapārśvagau . aparāśrayiṇī śukre tathā vaṅkṣaṇamadhyage .

ityaṇḍakoṣabhāgāḥ syuḥ kramādāsanamucyate .

tadantaścāsanañcordhaṁ vakravaṁśasya pṛṣṭhataḥ .

bhavedaparavaṁśaśca tatonyaccādha āsanam . paścimāsanamapyasya

pṛṣṭhataḥ paragasya ca . ata āstipradeśaśca tato vaṁśaśca bāladhiḥ .

(āstirāsanam) . āśrayetyabhidhānāśca bhāgāḥ paścānniṣādinaḥ . syātāṁ

ca tatpalādhastāt pakṣasandhī tathā tataḥ . syātāñca pakṣapārśve ca

garmūkāścakramādapi . pakṣādhonantarau cānukukṣī pakṣasamāstutī .

niṣkābhau madhyagau tatra śaṅkūcaivordhamadhyataḥ . kakṣābhogau

kākapakṣau śaṅkucchāyākarautataḥ . utkṛṣṭaukukṣipaścācca

tryasthipārśvagatāvapi . kālakotkṛṣṭadeśānāṁ pālavaṁśaśca pārśvayoḥ .

kālake piṇḍike cādho vidyāccāparayoḥ sthite . utkṛṣṭapiṇḍikā

tryasthisthānamevālambanam . jaghanaṁ parato’smācca evaṁ kālavakā

daśa . bhavet pāyuśca pāyostu gudamabhyantaraṁ tathā . vahirgudasya

vartmasyāt gudāntaḥ kandaraṁ viduḥ . vilapāyvantare kakṣau tathā

piṇḍikayorapi . adhastādantare kiṁvinyantare tasya saṁsthitiḥ .

piṇḍikāghatha maṇḍūkyāvaṣṭhīlau piṇḍikāntare .

avayavapramāṇabhedāstartrava . piṇḍikāratnikāmānā puṣkaro’pi

bhavettathā . karṇasandhirbhaveccāpi taccāratnipramāṇataḥ .

karṇāpavartau pālyau ca syātāṁ hastasamucchritī . karṇāśrī ca tathā

vidyādvistāre dvādaśāṅgule . karṇāśrāvapi hastau dvāvāyāma pariṇāhataḥ

. karṇavartiṁ viddhi karṇapramāṇena ca ratnikām . śira āsanamuddiṣṭaṁ

mānena trikahastakam . śirasastu pramāṇena syāt ṣaḍaṅgulamāsanāt .

āsanena samaṁśīrṣaṁ kalyāṇakaramityapi . yasyāsanaṁ ca nīcena

śirasaḥ syāt ṣaḍaṅgulam . avāgro nāma sa prokto gajoninditalakṣaṇaḥ .

śiro yasya bhaveduccamāsanād dvādaśāṅgulam .

so’bhyudagrābhidhānena lakṣaṇādāsanaṁ bhavet . āsanaṁ

vaṅkṣaṇoddeśād grāhaśca pakṣabhāgataḥ . mañcasamānaphalaka

utkṛṣṭo’ṣṭhīsthito’pi ca . aṣṭītyevaṁ samākhyātaṁ lakṣaṇādāsanaṁ

bhavet . hastadvayapramāṇena pecakāt paścimāsanam .

dvādaśāṅgulanimnaṁ syādāsanāt paścimāsanam . sārdhahastatrayaṁ

cādhaḥ pramāṇamapi bāladheḥ . saptāṅgulapramāṇena pāyuśca

parimaṇḍalaḥ . aratniparimāṇena vidustadvadguṇāntaram .

aratnito’ghikaṁ yasya vistareṇa stanāntaram . tiryagromacayaṁ

gātramaribhyaḥ śīkadogajaḥ . aratnitrayamānena nābhideśastanāntaram .

nābhiśca bhūtrakoṣaśca gudāratnyardhamānataḥ . aṇḍakoṣaśca

hastārdhapramāṇena samanvitaḥ . dve cāratnī tathārdhaṁ ca

koṣamānaṁ bhavedapi . so’rdhahastadvayāyāmohastānāhayutomataḥ .

prauhe tu pariṇāhaḥ syādaratnidvitaya tathā . hastayoścārdha mānaṁ

syāt caturbhāgeṇa saṁyutam . talasya pārśvataḥ prauhāvaratnipramitau

matau . caturbhāgayutāratnirbhavennamratalopari . aṣṭāṅgulapramāṇena

syātāṁ tataḥ puronakhau . saptāṅgulaścāpanakhaḥ pārśve

pañcāṅgulānakhāḥ . caturviṁśatyaṅgulañca bhavedgātrāpare tathā .

aparābhyāṁ bhavedgranthiraratnyardhena mānataḥ . aratniśca

talāyāmobhavecca karayorapi . saptāṅgulāstu vaiśoṣāḥ pālyoḥ

pārśvanakhāstathā . pañcāṅgulāstryaṅgulāśca navacāpi nakhā matāḥ .

ityaṅgamānaṁ nāgasya diṅmātramihadarśitam . samāṅgā api mātāṅgā

dṛśyante duḥkhadāḥ kvacit . dṛśyante viṣamāṅgāśca kvacit

kalyāṇadāyinaḥ . tasmāt pramāṇaṁ keṣāñcidapramāṇatayā matam .

pramāṇaṁ kṛtasācāryaiḥ sarvairlakṣaṇa vedibhiḥ . athāṅgasaṅgamāttāvat

mātaṅgānāṁ guṇāguṇāḥ . bhūyo’nyaguṇadoṣābhyāṁ prasaṅgāt kathitāḥ

punaḥ . uparikramato vṛddho nātistabdhomṛdusthitiḥ .

vṛttamnigdhāccharomā ca lohitāṅguliṣuṣkaraḥ . sarvavyaktapramāṇaśca

gajaḥ kalyāṇakārakaḥ . bhāgyapradī bālahastastathāyatatanūruhaḥ .

arthado hīnavinduśca gajo duḥkhaprado maṁtaḥ . dvipāmṛtyukarā hrasvā

hīnapārśvāśca vṛddhidāḥ . puṣkaraṁ hīnamavyaktaṁ

vidyādbhartṛvināśanam . yuktamāne nigāle ca nirmalaśrotasī śubhe .

susamāhite ca syātāmut palāgrasamadyutī . unnaddhau kramavṛddhau ca

sigdhāvabhyuditau samam . dakṣiṇau ca samānau ca

prahārapraguṇacchavī . tataḥ pradakṣiṇāvartāvudāttau dantināṁ radau .

karaspṛgākṛtī cāpi śvetāsthisadṛśadyutī . viṣāṇe ca tathā myātāṁ cāpāgre

vāraṇasya ca . yo dakṣiṇaikadantasya śriyā tu rahito gajaḥ .

vāmaikadanto dantī ca duḥkhadaḥ sādinomataḥ . daśāṁ prāpya catuthīṁ

ca dvitīyāṁ yasya na dvijau . sthūlāvanāyatau syātāṁ sa mūḍho nāma

durgajaḥ . ūrdhasaṁsthānavakrau ca pratimānagatau na vā . yuyutsāmiva

kurvāṇā yasya bālāḥ sadurdvipaḥ . dantau halopamau yasya dīrghau

pārśvena connatau . dakṣiṇena viṣāṇena vāmadantadarantathā .

kārayedyastu mātaṅgo vāmadārī sa vai bhavet . tathā dakṣiṇadārī ca

dakṣiṇadaraṇaṁ tathā . vāmena kārayennoṣṭo yātuḥ svāminaeva saḥ .

tathā halaviśālena dantenaikena dantinaḥ sthūlenākharvadīrgheṇa

duḥsthitākhyo’pi varjitaḥ . antarnatābhyāṁ saddantaḥ kudanto’pi

natāvaghaḥ . kūpe vāmonnatiścāpi radābhyāṁ dviradaḥ kvacit .

dantadurvāsasākhyo hi dviradomadhyalakṣaṇaḥ . bahirnatauhastalambau

radau yasya sa durgajaḥ . kṛṣṇāyatau radau mūle vinahinti madāgatim .

śyāmalākāra radanāgranthimaddaśanāstathā . durjātā viṣamā

vakraphalakāśca kṛśāstathā . ātadīrghātihrasvāśca vadanenāghaśaṁsinaḥ

. triratnimitameḍhrasya pañcaratnimitoradaḥ . yaṣṭidantonukathito

rājaputra! manīṣibhiḥ . prapūrṇaṁ pratimānañca tārābhaṁ balivajitam .

sūkṣmavindu samānaddhaṁ mṛdutvakkāyaromaśam . svāyataṁ

pṛthubāhityaṁ sarvagātrasamāhitam .

raktauṣṭhatāludaśanavilagnamustvaṇasthitim . taṁ rājā varjayet yuddhe

śubhalakṣaṇa varjitam . bālārkasadṛśe yasya harivarṇavilocane .

manaḥśilāprabhe vāpi haryakṣo’sau subhikṣadaḥ . padmāpāṅge ca vipule

suprasanne sitāsite . yasyākṣiṇī sacākṣibhyāṁ vibhaktākhyo hitapradaḥ .

yasyatuṅge ca nayane mahatī dṛṣṭimaṇḍale . snigdhanirmalavarṇaśca

tārakākṣaḥ sa sammataḥ . yasyāsṛjaḥ samā bhāse vṛttākāre vilocane .

pārāvatākṣaṁ nāgaṁ taṁ praśaṁsanti śivapradam . hrasve nātyāyate

netre prasanne sūkṣmadarśane . yasya syātāṁ sacādhyakṣo vāraṇaḥ

śubhalakṣaṇaḥ . īṣadgairikasaṅkāśe dṛśyete yasya cākṣiṇī . dhvāṅkṣākṣaḥ

sa vinirdiṣṭo durbhikṣāribhayāvahaḥ . kṛṣṇāpāṅge śubhe netre

kāṁsyasadṛśasaprabhe . yasya syātāṁ bhaveccāyaṁ śūkarākṣā sa

garhitaḥ . samantato nopacite saṁsṛṣṭe ca manāgdṛśau prauḍhākūṭau

yasyāpi viṣvagakṣaḥ sa durbhagaḥ . vaiṣamyādviṣamaprekṣī neṣṭo

haritayā dṛśā . tathā niṣprabhayā dṛṣṭyā varjitaḥ kālapiṅgalaḥ .

tandrīryasyānudṛśyeta virūpaṁ viṣamaṁ tathā . tathaiva tiryag dṛk hastī

tiryakprekṣī ma dūṣaṇaḥ . adhaḥprekṣī ca yo yaḥ syādūrdhagāmivilocanaḥ

. sadṛśo babhrumārjāraprabhṛtyamatacakṣuṣām . sa syādaniṣṭa dṛk hastī

tiryakprekṣī ca dūṣaṇaḥ . adhaḥprekṣī ca sajñeyo

mṛdūrdhvagāmidarśanaḥ . dṛṣṭiḥ snigdhā praphullā ca susthitāmalatārakā

. ūrdhvapakṣma prasannasya vāraṇasya vilokyate . udagratārako nāmnā

sāmnā pārśvavisarpiṇī . vistabdhācalapakṣmā tu kupitā’nekapasya dṛk .

sarvāṅgalakṣaṇebhyo’pi cakṣurlakṣaṇamuttamam . ityevaṁ

lakṣaṇajñānāṁ pūrveṣāmanuśāsanam . praśastanetre dvirade

nṛpobhadrāṇi paśyati mastakādilakṣaṇantu prāyeṇa

bārhaspatyoktalakṣaṇasamamityatastannoktaṁ yatra viśeṣastaducyate .

ekakūpaprajātāni snigdhāni ca mṛdūni ca . romāṇīṣṭāni romṇāñca pecako

dakṣiṇāṅgajaḥ . lāṅgūlasyaiva romāṇi dṛśyante yasya hastinaḥ .

saṁhatāni vicitrāṇi sa pūjyo vāraṇoraṇe .

kariṇo vāmanatvādau kāraṇāntaraṁ tatphalañcoktaṁ tatraiva

vāyvākāśaguṇādhiṣṭhapṛthivīguṇasarjanāt . jāyatekila mātaṅgaḥ kubjo vā

vāmano’pi ca . yato bhūtaguṇo’nyonyamadhitiṣṭhati mānataḥ . tairguṇai

rjāyate kharvā dantīti munayoviduḥ . hīnāṅgohānikārī

syādadhikāṅko’dhikaṁ haret . rāṣṭrāhitau bhavetāñca khañjakubjāviti

sthitiḥ . āyāmānāha saṁyukto hṛsvākāro hi vāmanaḥ .

naṣṭhīvyantaraniryāṇo mahāsthisagado’pi ca . asthiśvetau ca rūkṣmau ca

dantau yasyāśritau karam . sa cālayitvā rājānaṁ hatvā vātha palāyate .

hrasvameḍhrāṅgulikaraḥ śrotrāśriśvetaromayuk .

kapikauśikakākāhinakulaprakhyalocanaḥ . kālāpaṅgalanetraśca

tanvānanahanustathā . balyā samānaniryāṇaḥ pratyagrapṛthupecakaḥ .

maṇḍūkābharucitvak ca sāsnānalasamo’pi ca . parimaṇḍala karṇaśca

spaṣṭadhvāṅkṣa śivadhvajaḥ . prauḍhonnatākṣi kūṭākṣaḥ

sakilāsāṅghrimehanaḥ . vyālaityavagantavyo nirmado dantidūṣaṇaḥ .

sabalī yasya sadānau prauhau cāpi kacācitau . civuke cāyatasthūle

vraṇaiśca tanurābilā . adhovaktrāṇi romāṇi hanū ca kṛśaromage .

suḍhakkākṛtayaḥ pādā ḍimbaityapi viśrutaḥ . āsyauṣṭhatālurasanāḥ kāla

kalmāṣakāntayaḥ . karṇaukacācitau nyūnau tāmbavarṇaśca bāladhiḥ .

karābhipreṣaṇāsaktau mānonāṅgulipuṣkale . sthūle ca pakṣmaṇī

netraprabhe duṣprekṣaṇe tathā . durbaddhāni tathāṅgāni

balīmukhanibhaṁ mukham . reṇudvirephānurūpā makṣikābhiścitākṛtiḥ .

aratnimānau dantau ca śuṣkāvapyanigūhitau . karṇe ca kaṭhine yasya

nīlagopaka vidyuti . vivarṇaṁ kaṭhinaṁ rūkṣaṁ bhinnamiśratanuruham .

napusakaśca mātaṅgo sa dūre tyāgamarhati . mañjiṣṭhārāgabhāvena

yattanurvānaropamā . sa pūtano’gnibhayado yūthahā parivarjitaḥ .

tiryakprekṣī cādhaḥprekṣī durgandhamadasaṁyutaḥ . kālapiṅgodaroneṣṭo

mātaṅgaḥ syāt mataṅgajaḥ . puṣkare stanamadhye ca vāmahaste

mataṅgajaḥ . kilāsairāvṛtaḥ syācca tadrāṣṭre durnayaṁ diśet .

paścātsamutthitāvāponityamīlitalocanaḥ .

bāhitthasaṁkṣiptamukhonibaddhākṣo mataṅgajaḥ . nyūnaṁ

viṁśativarṣasya dantau yasya pramāṇataḥ . atimātrau na vai syātāṁ

nāgonāgasamastu saḥ . hīnātiriktadaśano yasya vai tasya mṛtyudaḥ

ityavayavadoṣāḥ .

atha varṇastathāvartāḥ puṣpāṇyābhā svarogatiḥ . balaṁ

satvamanūkañca gandhobodhitamiṅgitam . syādbhūtaguṇavaiśeṣyād

varṇavaiśeṣyameva hi . vātādibhyo’pi doṣemyovarṇavaiśeṣyamiṣyate .

raukṣyaṁ parātirekeṇa sarvaṁ vātasya vaibhavet . soṣmatā śoṇitāt,

pittāt raudratā, saumyatendujā ityupakramya kapho garbhaśayānasya

snigdhatāṁ pratipadyate . pittaṁ garbhaśayānasya stabdhatvaṁ

pratipadyate . tatkarī kathitaḥ kālastathaiva snigdhadarśanaḥ . pittaṁ

kaphaśca yugapad veviṣṭi tu tatastataḥ . śyāmavarṇo’pi mātaṅgo jāyate

snigdhaeva vai . garbhe ca māṁsasahite kapharakte yadā sthite . ciraṁ

garbhaśayānasya harisnigdhastato’pyasau . raktapittakaphānāñca

saṅkaratvagatau tathā . haritāruṇapītādyā nānāvarṇā bhavanti hi .

sarvatrānugavātena mīlanādrūkṣatā bhavet . pāruṣyaṁ dhūsaratvaṁ ca

susnigdhatvaṁ bhavettathā . kvacidvarṇavibhedāśca

pūrvasambhavakāraṇāt . grahanakṣatracārācca pitṛvījavaśāttathā .

tatrāpi śvetavarṇāśca śukavarhimaṇitviṣaḥ . śuddhahemarucaścebhāḥ

sureṣu prāci ca kvacit . nṛṇāntu harayaḥ kṛṣṇāḥ śyāmāśca kariṇaḥ smṛtāḥ

. harirmadhusavarṇaśca kṛṣṇaścāñjanasannibhaḥ . na kālo na

harirnāgomadhvābhaḥ śyāma iṣyate . eteṣu tripu varṇeṣu

harivarṇovaromataḥ . iti varṇabhedakāraṇādinirūpaṇam .

āvartaḥ ṣaḍidhaścaiva tvagjodaśanabhaṅgajaḥ . koṣajaḥ

pakṣmajātaśca bālajo romajo’pi ca . koṣaromabhavau śastau

dantakalpanajaḥ śubhaḥ . śīkānarthapradāḥ

proktāstvagjapakṣmajabālajāḥ . bhūmidoromajāvartaḥ

koṣāvartojayapradaḥ . daśanasambhavāvartaḥ sutadārapradastathā .

kathitaḥ pakṣmajāvartojñātijātabhayapradaḥ . vraṇakṛdbālajāvartaḥ

sāmahā romasambhavaḥ . praśastodakṣiṇāvartovāmāvarto vigarhitaḥ .

mato vyakto mṛdusnigdhaḥ savarṇaḥ pītaromajaḥ . vāmāṅge

dakṣiṇāvartovāmāvartaśca dakṣiṇe . āvartaḥ sammato’bhīṣṭo

dvijarājasamaprabhaḥ . śubho’pyakṣetrajāto’sau śubhaṁ naiva

prayacchati . aśubhakṣetrajātaśca nāniṣṭaphaladaḥ śubhaḥ . avagrahe

grahatale stanayorantare tathā . grīvāyā makṣikūṭordhaṁ

kumbhayorantare tathā . utpale dantaveṣṭe ca karṇamadhye ca vakṣasi .

āvartā vāraṇānāṁ hi suniśceyāḥ śubhapradāḥ . stanāntare śiromadhye

kumbhāntaścūlikāntare . vakṣasyāvartasampannaḥ kuñjaraḥ

pañcamaṅgalaḥ . śīrṣāvarto’bhiṣekāya stanāvartojayāya ca . sukhāya

cūlikāvartaḥ kunbhororomajaḥ śriye . vaṁśe prauhe’tha bāhitthe

manyāsya sagade kaṭe . karṇe’kṣikūṭe nābhau ca

kakṣapakṣmāṁsakūkṣiṣu . bāladhau pecake meḍhre randhrasandhikalāsu

ca . āvartā na praśasyante karṇabhāgagatāśca ye .

koṇapramāṇalaghavomarmaparvapradeśagāḥ . aśubhakṣetrajātāśca

sakilāsāntarotthitāḥ . manonetrābhirāmo hi susūkṣmogadito mahān .

ūrdhvapravṛttodīrghaśca romajo’rthajayāvahaḥ . marmabhāgeṣu nāgasya

niṣṭhāste romajādayaḥ . samabhāgagatāvartāḥ sarvataḥ sukhadāmatāḥ .

ityāvartaḥ .

svastikādisusaṁsthānaṁ puṣpaṁ darśanadehajam . snigdhaṁ bhavet

śubhacchāyamacchinnaṁ vāñchitapradam . kabandhādikasaṁsthānaṁ

viṣatantusamaṁ sphuṭam . rūkṣaṁ kṛṣṇañca kusumaṁ

tātānarthakasaṁjñakam . dadyāt sutaṁ sitaṁ puṣpaṁ snigdhapītañca

hemadam . nīlotpalābhaṁ śīlāptyai snigdhakālañca vṛttidam . yadi syāt

pūjite bhāge kusumaṁ snigdhapāṇḍuram . suracāpasamākāraṁ

tadbhanedmūbhujaḥ śubham . śakraṁcāpanibhaṁ puṣpaṁ dantopari ca

dantinaḥ . diśediṣṭaṁ sumikṣaṁ ca kṣemaṁ ca kṣitirakṣiṇaḥ . stanāntaḥ

snigdharukṣe ca puṣpe nāga same tathā . puṣpe śrotrāntaḥkāle ca

mlānivṛddhiṁ vinirdiśet . śrīvṛkṣādinibhākāre vaijayantīdhvajopame .

śailaprāsādasadṛśe chatracāmaravīthibhiḥ . somasūryasamābhāse

śivikāyānamūrtibhiḥ . diṣṭe śubhāya nṛpaternindyamahisamākṛti .

śvakravyādanibhākāraṁ raṇāpasarakāraṇam . dhūmābhaṁ

puṣpamicchanti mṛtyave’gnibhayāya ca . kṛṣṇaṁ puṣpaṁ tathā neṣṭaṁ

dviṣadbhogavivardhanam . iti puṣpam

bhūkhāgnyambumarujjātā bhavecchāyā viṣāṇinām . śastā

bhūjalavahnyutthā na śastā khānilodbhavā . chāyāyāḥ sambhavaḥ

pūrvaṁ, parataḥ paritaḥ prabhā . chāyāyāḥ sambhavaḥ pūrvaṁ prabhā

tatparamaśnute . varṇamātraśritā cchāyā prabhā varṇasya nāśrayaḥ .

lakṣaṇāni tu nāgānāṁ pāpāni ca śubhāni ca . chāyāvaśāt phalantyeva

chāyā tenātilakṣaṇam . yasya syāllakṣaṇaṁ bhadraṁ chāyā bhadrā

bhavenna tu . na cāsau śubhadohastī chāyopahatalakṣaṇaḥ .

pāpalakṣaṇayukto’pi śubhacchāyāyutogajaḥ . phalaṁ lakṣaṇajaṁ hitvā

chāyāphalamavāpnuyāt . nīrājane’bhiṣeke ca dhvajocchrāye raṇodaye .

teṣu teṣu ca kāleṣu bhavecchāyā ca śomanā . vakṣasi pratimāne’ṁse

kumbhe karṇe kaṭeṣu ca . niryāṇe mastakasthāne veṣṭayośca kapolayoḥ .

piṇḍikājaghanābhoge teṣu teṣu padeṣu ca . pradeśeṣu pradhāneṣu

chāyāyā vīkṣaṇaṁ bhaved . praśastā pārthivī chāyā bahnijā jalajāpi ca .

neṣyate vyomajā chāyā mātariśvabhavāpi ca . pārthivī snigdhagambhīrā

sarvavarṇe vibhāvyate . chāyā hyāsāṁ ca raktā ca snigdhā

jāmbūnadāgnijā . chāyā nīlāmbudābhāsā snigdhā salilasambhavā .

avyaktaparuṣā tasyachāyā gaganajā matā . dhūmrā rūkṣā ca vāyavyā

bhasmābhā niṣprabhā tathā . etāśchāyāḥ parīkṣyāḥ syurmātaṅge

rājapūjite . nīlāmbujendranīlābhā nīlāñjananibhā’pi ca . kvāpyuktā pārthivī

cchāyā subhikṣakṣemakāriṇī . bālārkapadmakiñjalkaśakragopakasannibhā

. jvālābhā taptahemābhā vahnijā vijayapradā . chāyāmmayī

payaḥśaṅkhakundarūpyanibhadyutiḥ . saugyākhyayā pratītā ca

bharturarthapradā sadā . jalabudvudasaṅkāśā dhūmradyutiratisthirā .

nindyā ca vyomajā chāyānityodvegakarī matā . sarvavarṇairupetā’pi

niṣprabhā bhasmasannibhā . vicchinnā vikṛtā cchāyā vāyavī sā bhayāvahā

. vairiñcī vaiṣṇavī śaivī chāyā māghavanī tathā . kaumārī rākṣasī sārpī

gāndharvī ca tathā»surī . paiśācī ceti yāśchāyā śchāyādivyāḥ kvacit

śubhāḥ . bhūtotthalakṣaṇe tāsāṁ bhedoneha tu kīrtitaḥ . tejo’tisaktā

bhadrasya pāṭalā bhavati prabhā . chāyā raktakalā

rukmapadmapūganibhā’pi vā . kṛṣṇā ca mandakariṇaśchāyā tu

mṛgahastinaḥ . malināmbaradhūmreva gīrvāṇāyudhadarśanā iti chāyā .

hastināṁ vividhā dhvānāśchidrebhyaḥ karato’pi ca . bhavanti

vāyuvaśato gātrāṇāṁ veṣṭanena ca . prayāṇeṣvabhiṣikteṣu dhvaje

jātikuleṣu ca . nāgeṣu vṛṁhitaṁ grāhyaṁ mattastabdhe na jātiṣu .

hṛṣito’tyastanidrāntastṛṣito vṛṁhati kvacit . yadi dantī śubhe deśe samaye

ca vasupradaḥ . darśayedvṛṁhitaṁ bhadraṁ tatphalaṁ sphītamādiśet .

sarovare tathā»rāme goṣṭhe vibudhaveśmani . nikuñje hṛdyadeśe hi

vijñeyaḥ śubhadodhvaniḥ . yātrāyāmabhiṣeke ca yajñādisamaye tathā .

samaye caiva puṇye ca vṛṁhitaṁ syācchivapradam . aśmādikāṣṭha

balmīkaduṣṭasthāne bhayapradaḥ . sunīce ca pradhūme ca

pratiśyāyadineṣu ca . atiśīte’tigharme ca prabhāte cāśubhoravaḥ . mūtale

nyastahasto hi paryaśrunayanogajaḥ . kūjan nirvyathanaṁ kuryāt yadi vā

naśyatīśvaraḥ . kareṇa vṛṁhitonāgo duścittāśrupariplutaḥ .

ādiśenmantriṇonāśamatha vā pṛthanāpateḥ . vyāyataśramahastasya

sāsrādhogatacakṣuṣaḥ . jaghane vāmato bālaṁ tathā nikṣipato’sakṛt .

(bālaṁ bāladhim) . niṣīdato laṅghayato hṛṣṭaromṇovimūrchataḥ . vāme

nikṣipya gaṇḍūṣaṁ vṛṁhitaṁ syādanarthakṛt . kheyaḥ sravati nāgānāṁ

dhamatāṁ yadi śoṇitam . (khebhyaḥ chidrebhyaḥ) tathā manyāntadeśe

ca prāṇināṁ kṣayamādiśet . yadyāgneyīmukhobhūtvā prācyāṁ

bā’rkodayaṁ prati . dantī tīkṣṇaravaṁ kuryāttadā syāt pāvakādbhayam .

kareṇa yadi mātaṅgo vṛṁhamāṇaḥ stanaṁ spṛśet . ālāne lambamānastu

saṁyuti kṣayamādiśet . (saṁyuti yuddhe) . ālāne lambamānastu

śītkurvan kurute dhvanim . gātraṁ praṁṅkholayannāgastataḥ

prasthānamādiśet . kṣiptvā karaṁ viṣāṇasthaṁ viṣamaṁ kūjate yadi .

nirīkṣamāṇo gaganaṁ hatāṁ vṛṣṭimudāharet . yadābhyunnatavaktreṇa

stanasthānañca jighrataḥ . tathā kuñcitahastena mukhaṁ gātraṁ ca

jighrataḥ . kurvato dakṣiṇaṁ hastaṁ śanairnikṣipato’pi yat . vṛṁhitaṁ

syāttadiṣṭañca tathānyonyakaraspṛśaḥ . gṛhītvā śubhavastūni kusumādīni

ced dvipaḥ . kuryācchabdaṁ śumaṁ tena phalaṁ śubhataraṁ bhavet .

uccairabhimukhaḥ śānto yadā nadati vāraṇaḥ . arūkṣamadhyamānena

tadā tatra jayī dhruvaḥ . mukhena maṇḍūkaravān karṇābhyāṁ

dundubhidhvanim . kareṇa murajārāvān kurvan kalyāṇakārakaḥ .

kalaṇādisamārāvā vikaṭāna samāḥ smṛtāḥ . iti dhvaniḥ . gatibale tu

prāgukte evātra prāyeṇa darśite nātaste atrodāhṛte .

satvaṁ trividhamicchanti śreṣṭhamadhyādhamairguṇaiḥ . sātvikaṁ

rājasaṁ cāpi tāmasañca viṣāṇinām . eṣāmapi guṇājñeyā bahavaste na

kīrtitāḥ . satvasyoktāguṇāḥ śauryaṁ buddhirdhairyaṁ suharṣatā .

rajasoye guṇāste ca krodhotsāhā vapi kvacit . guṇāśca

tamasastantrātamomohapramāditāḥ . hrīmantaḥ kāntiyuktāśca prājñāśca

cirajīvinaḥ . kriyākleśasahāḥ śrāntāḥ sātvikāḥ sāmasambhavāḥ . śiṣyāśca

madhyasādhyāśca kīrtitānirbhayāḥ kvacit . kriyāyogasahāḥ kiñcidrājasā

madhyamāyuṣaḥ . tāmasā duḥkhitā mūḍhā virūpā laghujīvitāḥ .

yukto’pyanyaguṇaiḥ sarvairyutaścet sātvikai rguṇaiḥ . śreyoguṇaḥ sa

samare tathā’dhvani mataṅgajaḥ . eṣāṁ vāgīśanirdiṣṭā viṣayāpekṣayā

sthitiḥ . bhadre sannihitaṁ satvaṁ, rajomande, tamo mṛge .

devagandharvayakṣāṇāṁ pannagāsurarakṣasām . piśācānāṁ nṛṇāṁ

tulyaṁ vedyaṁ nāgasya ceṣṭitam . iti satvam .

yat pūrvasambhavaṁ spaṣṭaṁ satvaṁ rūpaṁ gatiḥ svaraḥ .

tasyānukaraṇāt yuktamanūkamiti kovidāḥ . satvarūpajavārāvaiḥ

śubhānukāritā śubhā . devarṣigaṇagandharvanāgānūkāḥ śubhāmatāḥ .

evameva ca duṣṭānukṛtoduṣṭāḥ prakīrtitāḥ .

daityarakṣaḥpiśācānāmanūkaṁ parivarjitam . vṛṣasiṁhaturaṅgādi

samānūkāmatā dvipāḥ . neṣṭāḥ saradagṛdhrādisamānākṛtiyoginaḥ .

anūkam .

āsyākṣikumbhakarṇeṣu madaniśvāsavāyuṣu . śakṛdvamathumūtreṣu

gandhaṁ samupalakṣayet . iṣṭagandhānniṣeveta vāraṇān dharaṇīpatiḥ .

duṣṭagandhān sadā bhūpoyatnataḥ parivarjayet .

sarpirmadhusurālājadadhikṣīrānukārakaḥ .

śālyannośīramadirāpadmakāṣṭhādisannibhaḥ .

mālatīketakījātocandanādhikasaurabhaḥ .

surasālaphalāmogogandhonāgasya sammataḥ .

asṛṅmūtraśakṛtpūtivasākuṇapakutsitaḥ .

pakṣinīḍapalāṇḍvādisaptatigmavinirmitaḥ . kharoṣṭraśūkarasamaḥ

śyaśānadhūmasannibhaḥ . mīnamatkuṇatulyaśca gandhonāgasya

duḥkhadaḥ . iti gandhaḥ .

pañcadhā viditaṁ syācca vijñeyaṁ sāmajanmanām .

atyarthottānagambhīrapratyarthānvarthabhedataḥ . yastūdghātādudvijate

dūrādaṁsādi saṁkucet . atyarthaṁ saṅkucet spṛṣṭaḥ sa gajo’tyarthave

ditā . yo’pi tvaksparśamātreṇa romasparśavaśena vā .

vidyāddaṇḍāṅkuśādīṁśca sa syāduttānaveditā . tvagbhedāt śoṇitasrāvāt

tīvrapravyathanādapi . aṅkuśādīn vijānāti sa hi gambhīraveditā .

śanairhatobhṛśaṁ vetti śanairvetti bhṛśāhataḥ . viparītamatirnāgo jñeyaḥ

pratyarthaveditā . pratyeti vārya māṇo yo nigṛhītaśca gacchati .

pratilomāyate saṁjñāṁ so’pi pratyarthaveditā . śanairhataḥ

śanairvettibhṛśaṁ vetti bhṛśāhataḥ . pratyeti pratiṣiddhaśca

nodyamānaśca gacchati . yathāsaṁjñaṁ vidadhyācca sarvakarmāṇi

yo’dbhutam . anvarthavedinaṁ prājñojānīyāttaṁ śubhaṁ gajam iti

viditam .

mataṅgajeṅgitaṁ vakṣye śṛṇu tadavadhānataḥ . śubhajñānañca yena

syāt yātrādisamaye nṛpa! . anuyātraṁ gatohanyāt kiñcidrūpaṁ yadi

dvipaḥ . tajjayaḥ, pratiyātraṁ tu rūpāhatyā parājayaḥ . dṛṣṭvā

ripūnabhimukhān vāryamāṇo’pi cedgajaḥ . vrajettadvijayonūnaṁ yadi vā

prāptavān vaśe . dakṣiṇenāgrapādena kṣitimutpāṭayedyadi .

uttolayedvāmapādaṁ tadā jayamudīrayet . kareṇa cāgrahastena yadā

pṛthvīṁ pramārjayet . siñcatyanena karṇau ca tadā saukhyaṁ samādiśet .

pecakaṁ kuṭilaṁ kṛtvā karaṁ jighrati cet dvipaḥ . prahṛṣṭahṛdayāṅghriśca

tadābhyudayamādiśet . dakṣiṇaṁ tu yadā dantaṁ dantī pramuditendriyaḥ

. pariṣvajati hastena tadā syāt priyasaṅgamaḥ . tathaiva galasandhiñca

paṣkareṇa parāmṛśan . śrīyogamupayātaṁ tu vāraṇovinivedayet .

saṅkocya dakṣiṇaṁ pādaṁ vāmapādena vā bhuvam . vilikhedvāraṇaḥ

khinnastadbhartuḥ syāt parājayaḥ . yadā tu durmanādantaṁ vāmaṁ

hastena śodhayet . tadātmanovadennāśaṁ yāturvātha niṣādinaḥ . kareṇa

vāmagātraṁ ca khinnagātraḥ pramārṣṭi cet . tadāniṣṭaṁ

bhavedbharturanyathā ca śubhaṁ bhavet . vyathamānaḥ patet trastaḥ

kakṣabandhe yadā dvipaḥ . nābhinandecca mālyādi tadā paribhavo bhavet

. akasmādeva kupyanti bhramanti ca patanti ca . kariṇo yadi tadvidyāt

vigrahaṁ samupasthitam . yadā paśyati mātaṅgovidravañca parājayam .

pravāsaṁ pararāṣṭraṁ vā tadā bhavati durmanāḥ . adaṁśavraṇapīḍāyāṁ

kareṇa parivījanāt . gaṇḍūṣadeśaniṣpeṣāt savyājamupasarpaṇāt .

akasmācca skhaladgatyā dharaṇyāṁ praṇipātanāt .

jalapratāravaimukhyādahitabhakṣyasevanāt . stabdhakarṇatayā gatyā

pādāgraveśanādapi . drutadadrvādipīlutvādakalyāṇakaraḥ karī .

āttagrahojalottīrṇoripūṇāṁ grahaṇaṁ vadet iṅgitam .

jāyate dvividhaḥ kopaḥ saṁścāsaṁśca viṣāṇinām .

śiṣyakrodhohyabhīṣṭaḥ syādaniṣṭo’śiṣyaroṣaṇaḥ . yaḥ krudhyati cireṇaiva

mṛdukrodho bhavedapi . vāgdaṇḍamātrabandhaiśca pratiṣiddho na

muhyati . anuśāmyati roṣācca sa śiṣyakrodhasaṁjñitaḥ . iṣyate

sarvakāryeṣu śubhajātirmataṅgajaḥ . yaḥ krudhyatyaciriṇaiva bhṛśakrodho

bhavedapi . pratiṣiddhaśca vāgdaṇḍatīkṣṇaprajanakāṅguśaiḥ .

muhyatyeva cireṇāpi roṣādviratimeti ca . aśiṣyakrodhasaṁjño’sau vijñeyo

vāraṇādhamaḥ iti kopaḥ . vistarastu pālakāvyādau dṛśyaḥ .

करिन् — karin Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899karin mfn. doing, effecting &c. on

karin m. «having a trunk», an elephant

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

karin m. [kara-ini]

(1) An elephant.

(2) The number ‘8’ (in Math.).

— Comp.

—iṁdraḥ, —īśvaraḥ, —varaḥ a large elephant, lordly elephant;

sadādānaḥ parikṣīṇaḥ śasta eva karīśvaraḥ Pt. 2. 70; dūrīkṛtāḥ karivareṇa

madāṁdhabuddhyā Nītipr. 2.

—kuṁbhaḥ the frontal globe of an elephant; Bv. 2. 177.

—kusuṁbhaḥ a fragrant powder of nāgakeśara. —garjitaṁ the

roaring of an elephant (bṛṁhitaṁ karigarjitaṁ Ak.)

—daṁtaḥ ivory.

—dārakaḥ a lion.

—nāsikā a musical instrument.

—paḥ an elephant-driver.

—potaḥ, —śāvaḥ —śāvakaḥ a cub, young elephant.

—baṁdhaḥ a column to which an elephant is tied.

—mācalaḥ a lion.

—mukhaḥ an epithet of Gaṇeśa.

—yādas n., a water-elephant.

—vara = -iṁdra q. v.

—vaijayaṁtī a flag carried by an elephant.

—skaṁdhaḥ a herd or troop of elephants.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

karin (von kara «Rüssel») m. «Elephant» AK. 2, 8, 2, 2. H. 1217. N. 13, 8.

MBH. 1, 8153. ŚĀNTIŚ. 1, 22. PAÑCAT. II, 73. III, 235. RAGH. 3, 3. 37.

BHĀG. P. 8, 2, 22. kariśāvaka m. «ein Elephantenkalb» AK. 2, 8, 2, 3.

TRIK. 2, 8, 36. karipota m. dass. HALĀY. im ŚKDR. karigarjita n. «das

Gebrüll eines Elephanten» AK. 2, 8, 2, 76. kariṇī «Elephantenweibchen» 4.

3, 4, 14, 78. 28, 219. 1, 1, 2, 6. TRIK. 2, 8, 35. HĀR. 52. BHARTṚ. 3, 82.

VIKR. 64, 12. KATHĀS. 13, 17. BHĀG. P. 4, 9, 53. 8, 2, 31.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

karin karin, i. e. kara + in,

I. m. An elephant, Kir. 5, 7.

II. f. iṇī, A female elephant, Bhartṛ. 3, 82.

— Comp. dikkarin, i. e. diś-, m. an elephant of a quarter or point of the

compass, one of the eight supporting the globe, Bhāg. P. 8, 10, 24. vana-,

m. a wild elephant. sura-, m. an elephant of the gods, Kir. 5, 26.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

karin m. -ṇī f. an elephant (lit. having a trunk).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

karin kar-in, a. making, fashioning; m. elephant; (ṇ) ī, f. female elephant.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

karin puṁ strī karaḥ śuṇḍaḥ prāśastyenāstyasya ini . hastini gaje

vṛṁhitaṁ karigarjitam amaraḥ muktāphalāya kariṇam hariṇa palāya vyā°

udā° . arikariharaṇārthaṁ yojanānāmaśītyā līlā° . karīva siktaṁ pṛṣataiḥ

payomucām kaṭaprabhedena karīva pārthivaḥ raghuḥ āyāmavadbhiḥ

kariṇāṁ ghaṭāśataiḥ māghaḥ . 2 aṣṭasaṁkhyāyām ekāādiśabde vivṛtiḥ .

karibhedādikam pṛ° 959 ibhaśabde uktam . tannāmanāmake 3

nāgakepare pu° .

कुण्जर — kuṇjara Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kuṇjara m. (ifc. f. «ā» an elephant &c.

m. anything pre-eminent in its kind (generally in comp. e.g. «rāja-k-«,

«an eminent king» ; cf. g. «vyāghrādi»)

m. the number «eight» (there being eight elephants of the cardinal

points)

m. a kind of temple

m. a kind of step (in dancing to music)

m. the tree Ficus religiosa

m. N. of a Nāga

m. of a prince (of the Sauvīraka race)

m. of a mountain

m. of a locality

कुम्भिन् — kumbhin Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kumbhin mfn. having a jar

mfn. shaped like a jar

kumbhin m. «having on his forehead the prominence called «kumbha»»,

an elephant

kumbhin mfn. (hence) the number «eight»

mfn. a crocodile

mfn. a kind of poisonous insect.

mfn. a sort of fragrant resin («guggulu») or the plant bearing it

mfn. N. of a demon hostile to children

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kumbhin (von kumbha) 1) adj. «mit einem Kruge versehen» ṚV. 1, 191,

14. LĀṬY. 4, 3, 23. — 2) m. a) Name eines den Kindern feindlichen

Dämons PĀR. GṚHY. 1, 16 (ZdmG.7, 531 ist, wie wir durch STENZLER

erfahren, Kumbhin, Śatru st. Kumbhīraśatru zu lesen). — b) «Elephant»

(vgl. kumbha 1,d) H. 1217. HĀR. 14. ŚṚÑGĀRAT. 17. — c) «Krokodil» H.

1349. Vgl. kumbhīra. — d) «ein best. giftiges Insect» SUŚR. 2, 288, 1. — e)

«ein best. wohlriechendes Harz» (s. guggulu) JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kumbhin a. having a jar; m. elephant.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kumbhin puṁstrī° kumbho’styasya ini . 1 hastini 2 kumbhīre hemaca°

striyāṁ ṅīp . 3 guggulau jaṭā° . 4 kala saradhāriṇi tri° striyāṁ ṅīp udakaṁ

kumbhinīriva ṛ° 1 . 191 . 14 . ṅīvantaḥ . 5 jayapālavṛkṣe rājani°

kumbhivījaṁ jayapālavījamityukteḥ 6 pṛthivyāṁ gaurilākambhinī kṣapreti

mā° 20, 54 ślo° vyā° mallināthadhṛtakoṣāt .

गज — gaja Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899gaja m. an elephant &c. (ifc. f. «ā»

gaja m. (= «dig-g-«) one of the 8 elephants of the regions

gaja m. (hence) the number «eight»

m. a measure of length (commonly Gaz, equal to two cubits = 1 3/4

Or 2 Hastas)

m. a mound of earth (sloping on both sides) on which a house may be

erected

gaja m. = «-puṭa» q.v.

gaja m. (in music) a kind of measure

m. N. of a man

m. of an Asura (conquered by śiva) lxviii

m. of an attendant on the sun

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

gaja m. 1) «Elephant» AK. 2, 8, 2, 2. H. 1217. MED. j. 7. ADBH. BR. in

Ind. St. 1, 39. M. 8, 296. 11, 136. VIŚV. 4, 12. DAŚ. 1, 20. SUŚR. 1, 79,

20. 193, 4. 204, 10. 2, 67, 4. ŚĀK. 32. 190. HIT. I, 45. 95. 181. VET. 28,

18. gajavṛṁhita SUŚR. 1, 107, 10. grāmyagajāḥ, vanagajāḥ N. 13, 7.

gajapuṁgava BHARTṚ. 2, 26. gajāpasada PAÑCAT. 80, 21. Am Ende

eines adj. comp. f. ā R. 2, 57, 7. gajī f. «Elephantenweibchen» BHĀG. P. 4,

6, 26. — 2) = diggaja «Weltelephant», daher symbol. Bezeichnung «der

Zahl Acht» ŚRUT. 13. — 3) «ein best. Maass» MED. = 2 oder 1(3/4) Hasta

ŚKDR. — 4) «ein zum Aufbau eines Hauses besonders zugerichteter Platz»

(vāstunaḥ sthānabhede) MED. «a mound of earth sloping on both sides»

(in Gestalt eines «Elephanten), on which a house may be erected», WILS.

prastāre dairghyamānaṁ tu svahastena tathā naraiḥ. kṛtvā trighnaṁ

gajairhṛtvā vāstusthānanirūpaṇam.. dhvajo dhūmaśca siṁhaśca śvā vṛṣaḥ

khara eva ca. gajaḥ kākapadaṁ caiva sthānānyaṣṭau ca vāstunaḥ.. dhvaje

vibhūtirmaraṇaṁ ca dhūme siṁhe jayaḥ śvā ca karotyanartham. vṛṣe ca

bhogī kṣayaṇaṁ khare ca puṣṭirgaje kākapade vināśaḥ.. JYOT. im ŚKDR.

— 5) «eine zum Kochen von Arzenei in der Erde gemachte Vertiefung von

best. Umfange»: hastapramāṇagarto yaḥ puṭaḥ sa tu gajāhvayaḥ. itthaṁ

cāratnike kuṇḍe puṭo vārāha ucyate.. VAIDYAKAPRAYOGĀMṚTA im

ŚKDR. — 6) N. pr. eines Dieners des Sonnengottes H. 103, Sch. eines von

Śiva besiegten Asura; daher gajāsuhṛd und gajāsuradveṣin Beinamen von

Śiva H. 200 und Sch. — Vgl. garja.

gaja 1) gajī «Elephantenweibchen» BHĀG. P. 10, 33, 23. — 2) WEBER,

JYOT. 101. — 6) ein Asura Verz. d. Oxf. H. 71,b,7. — 7) N. pr. eines

Mannes MBH. 6, 3997.

gaja 2) als Bez. «der Zahl acht» SŪRYAS. 2, 25. 27. 35. 8, 3.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

gaja 1 I A powerful monkey King who fought on the side of Śrī Rāma

against Rāvaṇa. (Vana Parva, Chapter 283, Verse 3).

gaja 2 II Younger brother of Śakuni, the son of Subala. He, along with his

brother fought in the great war against the Pāṇḍavas and got killed by

Irāvān. (Bhīṣma Parva, Chapter 90).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

gaja gaja, for original garj + a,

I. m. An elephant, Man. 8, 296.

II. f. jī, A female elephant, Bhāg. P. 4, 6, 26.

— Comp. araṇya-, m. a wild elephant, 219, 15. āśā-, m. an elephant,

supposed to support a quarter of the world, Rām. 1, 43, 7 Gorr. diggaja, i.

e. diś-, and diśā-, m. the same, Rām. 5, 3, 13; 1, 41, 13. mahā-, m. a

great elephant, Pañc. 69, 1. vana-, m. a wild elephant, Pañc. 80, 6. sura-,

m. Indra’s elephant = Airāvata, q. cf. Kir. 5, 47. When latter part of a

comp. adj. the fem. ends in jā, e. g. sa-gaja, adj., f. jā, With elephants,

Rām. 2, 57, 7.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

gaja m. elephant (f. ī); a man’s name.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

gaja gaja, m. elephant;

ī, f. female elephant.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

gaja svane . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvāṁ-paraṁakaṁ-seṭ .) gajati . iti

durgādāsaḥ ..

gaja i made svane . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvāṁ-paraṁakaṁ-seṭ idit .)

i, karmaṇi gañjyate . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

gaja ka svane . (curāṁ-paraṁ-akaṁ-seṭ .) ka, gājayati . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

gaja made svane ca bhvā° para° aka° seṭ . bhajati agājīt ajagīt . jagāja .

gajaḥ .

gaja svane bhvā° idit para° aka° seṭ . gañjati agañjīt . jamañja . gañjyate

. gañjā .

gaja khane curā° ubha° aka° seṭ . gajayati te ajaga jat ta .

gaja puṁstrī° gaja—made aca . 1 hastini nagajā na gajā dayitā dayitāḥ

bhaṭṭiḥ . ibhaśabde vivṛtiḥ . striyāṁ jātitvāt ṅīṣ . 2 aṣṭasaṁkhyāyām

gajānāmairāvatādīnamaṣṭatvāt tathātvam . kṛtvā trighnaṁ garjarhṛtvā

jyo° ta° gajabhuktaśeṣam tantrasā° . aratnīnāṁ

śatānyaṣṭāvekaṣaṣṭyānvitāni ca . gajapramāṇamākhyātaṁ

munibhirmānavedibhiḥ śabdārthaci° ukte 3 mānabhede .

sādhāraṇanarāṅgulyā triṁśadaṅgulako gajaḥ ityukte 4 mānabhede . 5

mānamātre 6 vāstumānabhede ca medi° . sa ca jyo° ta° uktaḥ yathā

prastāradairghyamānaṁ tu svahastena tathā naraiḥ . kṛtvā trighnaṁ

gajairhṛtvā vāstumānanirūpaṇam . dhvajo dhūmaśca siṁhaśca śvā vṛṣaḥ

khara eva ca . gajaḥ kākapadaṁ caiva mānānyaṣṭau ca vāstunaḥ jyo° ta°

. puṣṭirgaje kākapade vināśaḥ tatphalam 7 auṣadhapākārthe gartabhede

vaidyakam gajapuṭaśabde dṛśyam . gajānāṁ samūhaḥ tal . gajatā

tatsamūhe strī . tataḥ ūrdhvamāne daghnac, gajadaghna, dvayasac,

gajadvayasa, gajatulyordhaparimāṇe tri° . striyāṁ ṅīp . dvitīyaśca

tṛtīyaśca ūrdhvamāne satī mama vyā° kā° ukteḥ ūrdhvamāna eva tayoḥ

prayogaḥ . parimāṇamātre tu mātrac . gajamātra ityeva tri° .

गजः — gajaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

gajaḥ [gaj-made ac]

(1) An elephant; kacācitau viśvagivāgajau gajau Ki. 1. 36.

(2) The number ‘eight’.

(3) A measure of length, a Gaja or yard, (thus defined:

sādhāraṇanarāṁgulyā triṁśadaṁgulako gajaḥ).

(4) A demon killed by Śiva.

(5) One of the eight elephants of the quarters.

— Comp.

—agraṇī m. 1. the most excellent among elephants. —2. An epithet

of airāvata, the elephant of Indra.

—adhipatiḥ lord of elephants, a noble elephant.

—adhyakṣaḥ a superintendent of elephants.

—apasadaḥ a vile or wretched elephant, a common or low-born

elephant.

—aśanaḥ the religious figtree (aśvattha). (—naṁ) the root of a

lotus.

—ariḥ 1. a lion. —2. N. of Śiva who killed the demon gaja. —ājīvaḥ

‘one who gets his livelihood by elephants’, an elephantdriver.

—ānanaḥ, —āsyaḥ epithets of Gaṇeśa.

—āyurvedaḥ science of the treatment of elephants.

—ārohaḥ an elephant-driver.

—āhvaṁ, —āhvayaṁ N. of Hastināpura.

—iṁdraḥ 1. an excelent elephant, a lordly elephant; kiṁ ruṣṭāsi

gajeṁdramaṁdagamane S. Til. 7. —2. Airāvata, Indra’s elephant. -karṇaḥ

an epithet of Śiva.

—kaṁdaḥ a large esculent root.

—kūrmāśin m. N. of Garuḍa.

—gatiḥ f. 1. a stately, majestic gait like that of an elephant. —2. a

woman with such a gait.

—gāminī a woman having a stately elephant-like gait.

—chāyā a portion of time proper for a Śrāddha, time at the eclipse

of the sun; saiṁhikeyo yadā bhānuṁ grasate parvasaṁdhiṣu . gajacchāyā

tu sā proktā śrāddha tatra prakalpayet .. —daghna, —dvayasa a. as high

or tall as an elephant.

—daṁtaḥ 1. an elephant’s tusk. —2. an epithet of Gaṇeśa. —3.

ivory. —4. a peg, pin, or bracket projecting from a wall. -maya a. made of

ivory.

—dānaṁ 1. the fluid (ichor) exuding from the temples of an

elephant. —2. the gift of an elephant.

—nāsā the trunk of an elephant.

—patiḥ 1. the lord or keeper of elephants. —2. a very tall and

stately elephant; Śi. 6. 55. —3. an excellent elephant.

—puṁgavaḥ a large and excellent elephant; gajapuṁgavagtu

dhīraṁ vilokayati cāṭuśataiśca bhuṁkte Bh. 2. 31.

—puṭaḥ a small hole in the ground for fire.

—puraṁ N. of Hastināpura.

—baṁdhanī, —baṁdhinī a stable for elephants.

—bhakṣakaḥ the sacred fig-tree.

—bhakṣā the gum olibanum tree.

—maṁḍanaṁ the ornaments with which an elephant is decorated,

particularly the coloured lines on his head.

—maṁḍalikā, —maṁḍalī a ring or circle of elephants.

—mācalaḥ a lion.

—muktā, —mauktikaṁ a pearl supposed to be found in the

kumbhas or projections on the forehead of an elephant.

—mukhaḥ, —vaktraḥ, —vadanaḥ epithets of Gaṇesa.

—moṭanaḥ a lion.

—yūthaṁ a herd of elephants; R. 9. 71.

—yodhin a. fighting on an elephant.

—rājaḥ a lordly or noble elephant.

—vīthiḥ, —thī f. the three lunar mansions rohiṇī, ārdrā and

mṛgaśiras; rohiṇyārdrā mṛgāśiro gajavīthyabhidhīyate. —vrajaḥ a troop of

elephants.

—śikṣā the science of elephants.

—sāhvayaṁ N. of Hastināpura.

—snānaṁ (lit) bathing of an elephant; (fig.) useless or

unproductive efforts resembling the ablution of elephants which, after

pouring water over their bodies, end by throwing dirt, rubbish, and other

foul matter; cf. avaśeṁdriyacittānāṁ hastisnānamiva kriyā H. 1. 18.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

gajaḥ puṁ, (gajati madena matto bhavatīti . gaj + ac .) hastī . ityamaraḥ

. 2 . 8 . 34 .. (sa tu trividhaḥ . yathāha śabdārthacintāmaṇiḥ .

bhadro mando mṛgaścaiva vijñeyāstrivighā gajāḥ .. asya lakṣaṇādikaṁ

yathā, vṛhatsaṁhitāyāṁ 67 adhyāye . madhvābhadantāḥ suvibhaktadehā

na copadigdhāśca kṛśāḥ kṣamāśca . gātraiḥ samaiścāpasamānavaṁśā

varāhatulyairjaghanaiśca bhadrāḥ .. vakṣo’tha kakṣāvalayaḥ ślathāśca

lambodarastvagbṛhatī galaśca . sthūlā ca kukṣiḥ saha pecakena saiṁhī ca

dṛgmandamataṅgajasya .. mṛgāstu

hrasvādharavālameḍhrāstanvaṅghrikaṇṭhadvijahastakarṇāḥ .

sthūlekṣaṇāśceti yathoktacihnaiḥ saṅkīrṇanāgā vyatimiśracihnāḥ ..

pañconnatiḥ sapta mṛgasya dairghyamaṣṭau ca hastāḥ pariṇāhamānam .

ekadvivṛddhāvatha mandabhadrau saṅkīrṇanāgo’niyatapramāṇaḥ ..

bhadrasya varṇo harito madasya mandasya hāridraṁkasannikāśaḥ . kṛṣṇo

madaścābhihito mṛgasya saṅkīrṇanāgasya mado vimiśraḥ ..

tāmroṣṭhatāluvadanāḥ kalaviṅkanetrāḥ snigdhonnatāgradaśanāḥ

pṛthulāyatāsyāḥ .

cāponnatāyatanigūḍhanimagnavaṁśāstanvekaromacitakūrmasamānakum

bhāḥ .. vistīrṇakarṇahanunābhilalāṭaguhyāḥ

kūrmonnatadvinavaviṁśatibhirnakhaiśca . rekhātrayopacitavṛttakarāḥ

suvālā dhanyāḥ sugandhimadapuṣkaramārutāśca ..

dīrghāṅguliraktapuṣkarāḥ sajalāmbhodaninādabṛṁhiṇaḥ .

bṛhadāyatavṛttakandharā dhanyā bhūmipatermataṅgajāḥ ..

nirmadābhyadhikahīnanakhāṅgān kubjavāmanakameṣaviṣāṇān .

dṛśyakośaphalapuṣkarahīnān śyāvanīlaśabalāsitatālūn ..

svalpavaktraruhamatkuṇaṣaṇḍhān hastinīṁ ca gajalakṣaṇayuktām .

garbhinīṁ ca nṛpatiḥ paradeśaṁ prāpayedativirūpaphalāste .. * .. yathā,

bhaṭṭiḥ . 14 . 5 .

hayā jiheṣire harṣādgambhīraṁ jagajurgajāḥ ..) parimāṇaviśeṣaḥ . sa

tu hastadvayaṁ pādonahastadvayañca . (yathā, śabdārthacintāmaṇau .

aratnīnāṁ śatānyaṣṭāvekaḥ ṣaṣṭyadhikāni ca .

gajapramāṇamākhyātaṁ munibhirbrahmavādibhiḥ ..) vāstunaḥ

sthānabhedaḥ . iti medinī ..

prastāre dairghyamānantu svahastena tathā naraiḥ .

kṛtvā trighnaṁ gajairhṛtvā vāstusthānanirūpaṇam ..

dhvajo dhūmaśca siṁhaśca śvāṁ vṛṣaḥ khara eva ca .

gajaḥ kākapadañcaiva sthānānyaṣṭau ca vāstunaḥ ..

dhvaje vibhūtirmaraṇañca dhūme siṁhe jayaḥ śvā ca karotyanartham

.

vṛṣe ca bhogī kṣayaṇaṁ khare ca puṣṭirgaje kākapade vināśaḥ .. iti

jyotiṣam .. * .. aupadhapākārthagartaviśeṣaḥ . yathā —

hastapramāṇagarto yaḥ puṭaḥ sa tu gajāhvayaḥ .

itthaṁ cāratnike kuṇḍe puṭo vārāha ucyate .. iti

vaidyakaprayogāmṛtam .. (asuraviśeṣaḥ . sa tu mahiṣāsuraputtraḥ .

yathā, kāśīkhaṇḍe . 68 . 3 .

mahiṣāsuraputtro’sau samāyāti gajāsuraḥ .

pramathan pramathān sarvān nijavīryamadoddhataḥ ..)

गिरि — giri Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899giri loc. of 1. «gir».

giri f. id. g. «kṛṣy-ādi».

giri m. (for «gari», Zd. ‘gairi’ cf. «guru, garīyas»; ifc. a mountain, hill,

rock, elevation, rising-ground (often connected with «parvata», «a

mountain having many parts» [cf. «parvan»] &c.

m. the number «eight» (there being 8 mountains which surround

mount Meru), śrut.

m. a cloud

m. a particular disease of the eyes («kiri»

giri m. = «-guḍa»

m. a peculiar defect in mercury

giri m. = «gairīyaka»

m. a honorific N. given to one of the ten orders of the Daś-nāmī

Gosains (founded by ten pupils of śaṁkarācārya; the word «giri» is added

to the name of each member; cf. «gairika»)

m. N. of a son of śvaphalka

giri f. (= «girikā») a mouse

giri f. mfn. coming from the mountains

giri f. venerable ( iv, 37, 2 ; ([cf. Slav. ‘gora’; Afghan. ‘ghur’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

giri a. [gṝ-i kicca Uṇ. 4. 142] Venerable, respectable, worshipful. —riḥ

(1) A hill, mountain, an elevation; paśyādhaḥkhanane mūḍha gigyo na

pataṁti kiṁ Subhaṣ.; nanu pravāte’pi niṣkaṁpā girayaḥ S. 6.

(2) A huge rock.

(3) A disease of the eyes.

(4) An honorific title given to Sannyāsins; e. g. ānaṁdagiriḥ

(5) (In math.) The number ‘eight’.

(6) A ball with which children play (geṁduka).

(7) A cloud.

(8) A peculiar defect in quicksilver. —riḥ f.

(1) Swallowing.

(2) A rat; mouse (written also girī in this sense).

— Comp.

—iṁdraḥ 1. a high moun tain —2. an epithet of Śiva. —3. the

Himālaya mountain. —4. a term for the number ‘eight’.

—īśaḥ 1. an epithet of the Himālaya mountain. —2. an epithet of

Śiva; sutāṁ girīśapratisaktamānasāṁ Ku. 5. 3.

—kacchapaḥ a species of tortoise living in mountains.

—kaṁṭakaḥ Indra’s thunder-bolt.

—kadaṁbaḥ, —bakaḥ a species of the Kadamba tree.

—kaṁdaraḥ a cave, cavern.

—karṇikā the earth.

—kāṇaḥ a blind or one-eyed man.

—kānanaṁ a mountaingrove.

—kūṭaṁ the summit of a mountain.

—gaṁgā N. of a river.

—guḍaḥ a ball for playing with.

—guhā a mountain cave.

—cara a. roaming or wandering on a mountain; giricara iva nāgaḥ

prāṇasāraṁ bibharti S. 2. 4. (

—raḥ) a thief.

—ja a. mountain-born. (

—jaṁ) 1. talc. —2. red chalk. —3. benzoin. —4. bitumen. —5. iron. (

—jā) 1. N. of Pārvatī (the daughter of Himālaya). —2. the hill-

plantain (parvatakadalī) —3. the Mallikā creeper. —4. an epithet of the

Ganges. -tanayaḥ, —naṁdanaḥ, —sutaḥ 1. an epithet of Kārtikeya. —2. of

Gaṇeśa. -patiḥ an epithet of Śiva. -malaṁ talc.

—jālaṁ a range of mountains.

—jvaraḥ Indra’s thunderbolt.

—durgaṁ a hill-fort, any stronghold among mountains; nṛdurgaṁ

giridurgaṁ vā samāśritya vasetpuraṁ Ms. 7. 70, 71.

—dvāraṁ a mountain-pass.

—dhātuḥ red chalk.

—dhvajaṁ Indra’s thunderbolt.

—nagaraṁ N. of a district in Dakṣiṇāpatha.

—ṇadī or nadī a mountain-torrent, rill.

—ṇaddha (naddha) a. enclosed by a mountain.

—naṁdinī 1. N. of Pārvatī. —2. of the Ganges. —3. a river in general

(flowing from a mountain;) kaṁliṁdagirinaṁdinītaṭasuradrumālaṁbinī Bv.

4. 3.

—ṇitaṁbaḥ (nitaṁbaḥ) the declivity of a mountain.

—pīluḥ N. of a fruit-tree.

—puṣpakaṁ bitumen.

—pṛṣṭhaḥ the top of a hill.

—prapātaḥ the declivity or slope of a mountain.

—prasthaḥ the table-land of a mountain.

—priyā a female of the Bos Grunniens.

—bāṁdhavaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—bhid m. an epithet of Indra. (—f.) a river (breaking through a

mountain).

—bhū a. mountain-born. (

—bhūḥ f.) 1. an epithet of the Ganges. —2. of Pārvatī.

—mallikā the Kuṭaja tree.

—mānaḥ an elephant, especially a large and powerful one.

—mṛd f.,

—mṛdbhavaṁ 1. red chalk. —2. mountain soil.

—rāj m. 1. a high mountain. —2. an epithet of the Himālaya.

—rājaḥ the Himālaya mountain.

—vrajaṁ N. of a city in Magadha.

—śālaḥ a kind of bird.

—śṛṁgaḥ an epithet of Gaṇeśa. (

—gaṁ) the peak of a mountain.

—ṣada(sada) m. an epithet of Śiva.

—sānu n. table-land.

—sāraḥ 1. iron. —2. tin. —3. an epithet of the Malaya mountain.

—sutaḥ the Maināka mountain.

—sutā an epithet of Pārvatī.

—sravā a mountain torrent.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

giri 1) m. a) «Hügel, Berg, Gebirge; Höhe» Uṇ. 4, 144. AK. 2, 3, 1. H.

1027. an. 2, 409. fg. MED. r. 23. fg. ajrā indrasya girayaścidṛṣvāḥ ṚV. 6,

24, 8. 8, 15, 2. 4, 20, 6. sānu girīṇām 6, 61, 2. 8, 46, 18. vṛkṣakeśāḥ 5,

41, 11. girerbhṛṣṭiḥ 1, 56, 3. 61, 14. 63, 1. śuciryatī giribhya ā samudrāt 7,

95, 2. 8, 32, 4. 66, 6. Häufig verbunden mit dem adj. gebrauchten

parvataḥ vadhriḥ sa parvato giriḥ AV. 4, 7, 8. girayaste parvatā

himavantaḥ 12, 1, 11. 6, 12, 3. 17, 3. 9, 1, 18. parvataṁ giriṁ pra

cyāvayanti yāmabhiḥ ṚV. 1, 56, 4. (ni) jihīta parvato giriḥ 37, 7. 8, 53, 5.

girimātra adj. «Bergesumfang habend» ŚAT. BR. 1, 9, 1, 10. Nach NAIGH.

1, 10 und den Comm. bedeutet giri an vielen Stellen «Wolke», wanrend

man überall mit «Berg» oder «Höhe» ausreicht. Adjectivisch scheint das

Wort in der Stelle divaḥ śardhāya śucayo manīṣā girayo nāpa (etwa: «wie

Bergwasser»; vgl. girija) ugrā aspṛdhran ṚV. 6, 66, 11 gebraucht zu sein,

wofern hier der Text richtig überliefert ist. — yāvatsthāsyanti girayaḥ

saritaśca mahītale R. 1, 2, 39. N. 12, 18. RAGH. 2, 13. paśyādhaḥkhanane

mūḍha girayo na patanti kim ŚṚÑGĀRAT. 19. mahāgiri VID. 166.

himavadvindhyayoḥ — giryoḥ M. 2, 22. himavato gireḥ ŚĀK. 61, 6. Accent

eines auf giri ausgehenden comp. P. 6, 2, 94. — b) Bez. «der Zahl acht»

wegen der «acht Berge», die sich um den Meru lagern (vgl. VP. 171. fg.)

ŚRUT. 38. — c) «Spielball» (vgl. girika, giriguḍa) H. 688. H. an. MED.

VIŚVA im ŚKDR. — d) «eine best. Augenkrankheit(?)» H. an. MED. giriṇā

kāṇaḥ, girikāṇaḥ P. 6, 2, 2, Sch. Uṇ. 4, 144, Sch. — e) «eine best.

schlechte Eigenschaft des Quecksilbers»: nāgo vaṅgo malo

vahniścāñcalyaṁ ca viṣaṁ giriḥ. asahyāgnirmahādoṣā nisargātpārade

sthitāḥ.. RATNĀV. im ŚKDR. — f) = gairīyaka(?) H. an. — g) ehrendes

Beiw. einer Art von Saṁnyāsin (saṁnyāsināṁ paddhativiśeṣaḥ) ŚKDR. «a

title given to one order of the Dasnami Gosains» (s. WILS. a Gloss. of jud.

and rev. terms u. d. W. «Gosvami») WILS. Vgl. 3. — h) N. pr. eines Sohnes

des Śvaphalka (vgl. girikṣipa) VP. 435. — 2) f. a) (von 2. gar) «das

Verschlingen» gaṇa kṛṣyādi zu P. 3, 3, 108, Vārtt. 8. AK. 3, 3, 11. H. an.

MED. — b) «Maus» (vgl. girikā) RAMĀN. zu AK. im ŚKDR. — 3) adj.

«ehrwürdig» H. an. MED. Sch. zu R. 4, 37, 2. — Oefters ist von dem

«grossen Gewichte der Berge» die Rede, so dass man geneigt sein

möchte giri (vgl. «gairi» im Zend und russian) auch etym. mit guru (vgl.

garīyaṁs, gariṣṭha, gariman) zusammenzustellen.

giri 1) a) als Bild der Geduld Spr. 3924. — g) N. einer der zehn auf Schüler

Śaṁkarācārya’s zurückgeführten Bettelorden, dessen Mitglieder das Wort

giri ihrem Namen beifügen, Verz. d. Oxf. H. 227,b,16. WILSON, Sel. Works

1,202. fg.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

giri giri (for original gara; cf. Slav. gora, [greek] probably from gur for

gar), m.

1. A mountain, Rām. 1, 2, 29.

2. A name of the numeral eight, Śrutab. 38.

— Comp. antar-, m. land lying in the midst of mountains, MBh. 2, 1012.

asta-, m. the mountain behind which the sun is supposed to set, Śiś. 9, 1.

kāñcana-, m. a name of Meru, Bhāg. P. 5, 16, 28. kula-, m. a principal

mountain, Bhāg. P. 5, 16, 7. tuṣāra-, m. the Himālaya, MBh. 13, 836.

deva-, dhūmra-, rāma-, m. names of mountains. vahirgiri, i. e. vahis-, m.

land lying beyond a mountain, MBh. 2, 1012. svar- and svargi(n)-, m. the

mountain Sumeru.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

giri m. mountain, hill.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

giri gir-i, m. [the heavy], mountain.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

giri pu° gṝ—i kicca . 1 parvate . kucaro giriṣṭhā ityṛco niruktau 1 . 20 . giriḥ

parvataḥ samudgīrṇo bhavati ityuktam . sadordhvabāhuryovīro muktakeśo

digambaraḥ . sarvatra samabhāvena bhāvayedyāṁ narottamaḥ .

iṣṭadevīdhiyā nārīṁ sa giriḥ parikīrtita ityuktalakṣaṇe 2

tāntrikasaṁnyāsibhede, 3 parivrājakopādhibhede ca . yathā ānandagiriḥ .

gi(ra)lati stokam gṝ ac . 4 bālamūṣikāyāṁ strī vā ṅīp ramānāthaḥ . 5

netraroge medi° . girikāṇaḥ 3 ta° prakṛtisvaraḥ . 6 genduke viśvaḥ . 7

pūjye tri° medi° . 8 nigaraṇe strī amaraḥ . athāndhakāraṁ

girigahvarastham raghuḥ . girestaḍittvāniva tāvaduccakaiḥ māghaḥ . 9

meghe nigha° . girayo nāpa ugrā aspṛdhran ṛ° 6 . 67 . 11 . girayo meghāḥ

bhā° . giribhrajo normayo madantaḥ ṛ° 10 . 68 . 1 . giribhyo meghebhyo

bhraṣṭā nirgatāḥ bhā° . megho’pi giriretasmādeva jalādeḥ saṁgaraṇaṁ

bhavati niru° 120 . 10 pāradadoṣabhede malaṁ viṣaṁ vahnigirī ca

cāpalannaisargikaṁ doṣamuśanti pārade . upāṁdhijau dvau

trapunāgayogajau doṣau rasendre kathitā sunīśvaraiḥ . malena mūrchā,

maraṇaṁ viṣeṇa, dāho’gninā kaṣṭataraḥ śarīre . dehasya jāḍyaṅgiriṇā

sadā syāt, cāñcalyato vīryahṛtiśca puṁsām . vaṅgena kuṣṭhaṁ bhujagena

ṣaṇḍo bhavedato’sau pariśodhanīyaḥ . vahnirviṣa malañceti mukhyā

doṣāstrayo rase . ete kurdanti santāpaṁ mṛtiṁ mūrchāṁ nṛṇāṁ kramāt .

anye’pi kathitā doṣā bhiṣagbhiḥ pārade yadi . tathāpyete trayo doṣāḥ

śodhanīyā viśeṣataḥ bhāvapra° . tataḥparasya nadīnakhādīnāṁ

girinadyādi° pūrvapadasthanimittatrāt vā ṇatvam . giriṇa(na)dī giriṇa

(na)khaḥ giriṇa(na)ddhaḥ giriṇi(ni)tambaḥ .

द्विप — dvipa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899dvipa «dvi-pa» m. elephant (lit. drinking twice, sc. with his trunk and with

his mouth) &c. (ifc. f. «ā»)

m. N. of the number 8

m. Mesua Ferrea

dvipa «dvi-pa» m. «dvipapāri» m. «foe of elephants», a. lion

dvipa «dvi-pa» m. «-pāsya» m. «having an elephant’s face», N. of Gaṇeśa

dvipa «dvi-pa» m. «dvipapendra» m. = «-pa-pati»

dvipa «dvi-pa» m. «dvipendradāna» n. the rut-fluid of a large elephants

dvipa «dvi-pa» m. «-peśvara» m. = «-peudra», Malatim.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

dvipa (dvi + pa) m. VOP. 26, 33. 1) «Elephant (zweimal trinkend, zuerst

mit dem Rüssel, dann mit dem Maule») SIDDH.K. zu P.3,2,4. AK.2,8,2,2.

H.1217. M.7,192. HIḌ.4,11. R.1,6,23. BHĀG. P.8,7,18. dvipendra RAGH. 2,

7. 3, 32. ŚĀK. 102. HIT. I, 96. -mada «die zur Brunstzeit aus den Schläfen

quellende Feuchtigkeit beim Eleph.» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. -dāna dass. RAGH.

13, 20. dvipendradāna VARĀH. BṚH. S. 69, 17. Am Ende eines adj. comp.

f. ā MBH. 4, 2016. 13, 6929. 18, 21. R. 2, 88, 19. Vgl. gandha-, vana-,

dvipāyin. — 2) N. eines Baumes, «Mesua ferrea» (nāgakeśara), RATNAM.

im ŚKDR.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

dvipa dvi-pa (1. pā), m. An elephant (drinking twice, the elephant

imbibing fluids by his trunk and thence conveying them to his mouth),

Man. 7, 192.

— Comp. gandha-, m. a very strong kind of elephant, Vikr. d. 156. maru-,

m. a camel. sura-, m. an elephant of the gods.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

dvipa m. elephant (lit. drinking twice).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

dvipa dvi-pa, m. elephant (drinking twice, with trunk and mouth).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

dvipa puṁstrī° dvābhyāṁ mukhaśuṇḍābhyāṁ pibati pā—ka . 1 gaje

amaraḥ . vipūryamāṇaśravaṇīdaraṁ dvipāḥ sāghaḥ . syandanāśvaiḥ same

yudhyedanūpe naudvipaistathā manuḥ 2 nāgakeśre pu° .

पूर्व — pūrva Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899pūrva mf («ā») n. (connected with «purā, puras, pra», and declined like a

pron. when implying relative position whether in place or time, but not

necessarily in abl. loc. sg. m. n. and nom. pl. m.; see being before or in

front fore, first &c. &c.

mf («ā») n. eastern, to the east of (abl.)

mf («ā») n. former, prior, preceding, previous to, earlier than (abl. or

comp.) («gaja-pūrva», preceding the number «eight» i.e. seven, the

seventh ; «māsena p-» or «māsa-p-«, earlier by a month ; ifc. often =

formerly or before e.g. «strī-p-«, formerly a wife; «āḍhya-p-«, formerly

wealthy; esp. after a pp. e.g. «kṛta-p-«, done before, «dṛṣṭa-p-«, seen

before; ifc. also preceded or accompanied by, attended with e.g. «smita-

pūrvā-vāk», speech accompanied by smiles; sometimes not translatable

e.g. «mṛdu-pūrvā vāk», kind speech)

mf («ā») n. ancient, old, customary, traditional &c. &c.

mf («ā») n. first (in a series), initial, lowest (opp. to «uttara»; with

«dama» or «sāhasa» «the lowest fine»)

pūrva mf («ā») n. (with «vayas») «first age», youth

mf («ā») n. foregoing, aforesaid, mentioned before (abl.)

pūrva m. an ancestor, forefather (pl. the ancients, ancestors) &c. &c.

pūrva m. an elder brother

pūrva m. N. of a prince

pūrva mf («ā») n. («ā») f. (with or sc. «diś») the east

pūrva m. N. of a country to the east of Madhya-deśa

pūrva m. of the Nakshatras Pūrva-phalgunt, Pūrvāṣāḍhā and

Pūrvabhadrapadā collectively

pūrva n. the fore part (cf.

pūrva n. a partic. high number (applied to a period of years)

pūrva n. N. of the most ancient of Jaina writings (of which 14 are

enumerated)

pūrva n. N. of a Tantra

pūrva n. an ancient tradition

pūrva mf («ā») n. («am») ind. before (also as a prep. with abl.), formerly,

hitherto, previously (sometimes with pres.) &c. &c. (often ibc. e.g.

«pūrva-kārin», active before, «pūrvokta», said before; also ifc. in the sense

of «with» e.g. «prīti-pūrvam», with love; «mati-pūrvam» with intention,

intentionally; «mṛdu-pūrva-bhāṣ», to speak kindly; cf. above; also with an

ind. p. e.g. «pūrva-bhojam», or «-bhuktvā», having eaten before ; «adya-

p-«, until now, hitherto; previously «-tataḥ», first-then; «pūrva-paścāt»,

previously-afterwards; «pūrva-upari», previously-subsequently; «pūrva-

adhūnā» or «adya», formerly-now)

pūrva mf («ā») n. («eṇa») ind. in front, before

pūrva n. eastward, to the east of (opp. to «apareṇa», with gen. or acc.;

cf. &c. &c.

pūrva n. (with «tataḥ») «to the east of that»

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

pūrva a. (Declined like a pronoun when it implies relative position in time

or space, but optionally so in nom. pl.; and abl. and loc. sing.)

(1) Being in front of, first, foremost.

(2) Eastern, easterly, to the east of; grāmātparvataḥ pūrvaḥ Sk.

(3) Previous to, earlier than.

(4) Old, ancient; pūrvasūribhiḥ R. 1. 4; idaṁ kavibhyaḥ pūrvebhyo

namovākaṁ praśāsmahe U. 1. 1.

(5) Former, previous, interior, prior, antecedent (opp. uttara); in this

sense often at the end of comp. and translated by ‘formerly’ or ‘before’;

śrutapūrva &c.

(6) A foresaid. before-mentioned.

(7) Initial.

(8) Established, customary, of long standing.

(9) Early, prime. pūrve vayasi Pt. 1. 165 ‘in early age or prime of life.’

(10) (At the end of comp.) Preceded by, accompanied by, attended with;

saṁbaṁdhamābhāṣaṇapūrvamāhuḥ R. 2. 58; puṇyaḥ śabdo muniriti

muhuḥ kevalaṁ rājapūrvaḥ S. 2. 14; tānsmitapūrvamāha Ku. 7. 47;

bahumānapūrvayā 5. 31; daśapūrvarathaṁ yamākhyayā

daśakaṁṭhāriguruṁ vidurbudhāḥ R. 8. 29; so matipūrvaṁ Ms. 11. 147

‘intentionally’, ‘knowingly’; 12. 89; abodhapūrvaṁ ‘unconsciously’, S. 5. 2

&c. —rvaḥ An ancestor, a forefather; pūrvaiḥ kilāyaṁ parivardhito naḥ R.

13. 3; payaḥ pūrvaiḥ saniśvāsaiḥ kavoṣyamupabhujyate 1. 67; 5. 14;

anukāriṇi pūrveṣā yuktarūpamidaṁ tvāyi S. 2. 16. —rvaṁ The forepart;

anavaratadhanurjyāsphālanakrūrapūrvaṁ (gātraṁ) S. 2. 4. —rvā 1 The

east

(2) N. of a country to the east of Madhydeśa. —rvaṁ ind.

(1) Before (with abl.); māsātpūrvaṁ.

(2) Formerly, previously, at first, antecedently, before-hand; taṁ

pūrvamabhivādayet Ms. 2. 117; 3. 94; 8. 205; R. 12. 35; praṇipātapūrvaṁ

K.; bhūtapūrvakharālayaṁ U. 2. 17 ‘which formerly was the abode’, &c.;

samayapūrvaṁ S. 5 ‘after a formal agree ment.’

(3) Immemorially. (pūrveṇa ‘in front, before’, to she east of’, with gen.

or acc.; adya pūrvaṁ ’tillnow’, hitherto’; pūrvaṁḥ -tataḥ -paścāta upari

‘first-then, first-afterwards’, ‘previously, subsequently’, pūrvaṁadhutā or

adya ‘formerly-now.’

— Comp.

—agniḥ the sacred fire kept in the house (āvasathā). —acalaḥ, —

adriḥ the eastern mountain behind which the sun and moon are supposed

to rise.

—adhikārin m. the first occupant, a prior owner.

—aṁtaḥ the end of a preceding word.

—apara a. 1. eastern and western. katamo’yaṁ

pūrvāparasamudrāvagāḍhaḥsānumānālokyata S 7; pūrvāparau toyanidhī

vagāhya Ku. 1. 1. —2. first and last. —3 prior and subsequent, preceding

and following. —4. connected with another. (

—raṁ) 1. what is before and behind. —2. connection. —3. the proof

and the thing to be proved. -virodhaḥ inconsistency, incongruity.

—abhimukha a. turned towards or facing the east.

—abhyāsaḥ former practice or experience.

—aṁbudhiḥ the eastern ocean.

—arjita a. attained by former works. (

—taṁ) ancestral property.

—ardhaḥ —rdhaṁ 1. the first half; dinasya

pūrvārdhaparārdhabhinnā chāyeva naitrī khalasajjanānāṁ Bh. 2. 60;

samāptaṁ pūrva rdhaṁ &c. —2. the upper part (of the body); śakuṁtalā

pūrvārdhena śayanādutthāya S. 3; R. 16. 6. —3. the first half of a

hemistich.

—ahṇa; the earlier part of the day, forenoon, Ms. 4. 96; 152.

(pūrvāhṇatana, pūrvāhṇikaḥ pūrvāhṇatana a. relating to the forenoon).

—āvedakaḥ a plaintiff.

—āṣāḍhā N. of the 20th lunar mansion consisting of two stars.

—itara a, western.

—ukta, —udita a. beforementioned, aforesaid.

—uttara a. north-eastern. (

—rā) the northeast. (

—re dual) the preceding and following, antecedent and

subsequent.

—karman n. 1. a former act or work. —2. the first thing to be done,

a prior work. —3. actions done in a former life. —4. preparations,

preliminary arrangements.

—kalpaḥ former times.

—kāyaḥ 1. the fore-part of the body of animals; paścārdhena

praviṣṭaḥ śarapatanabhayādbhūyasā pūrvakāyaṁ S. 1. 7. —2. the upper

part of the body of men; spṛśan kareṇānatapūrvakāyaṁ R. 5. 32;

paryaṁkabaṁdhasthirapūrvakāyaṁ Ku. 3. 45.

—kāla a. belonging to ancient times. (

—laḥ) former or ancient times.

—kālika, -kālīna a. ancient.

—kāṣṭhā the east, eastern quarter.

—kṛta a. previously done. (

—taṁ) an act done in a former life.

—koṭiḥ f. the starting point of a debate, the first statement or

pūrvapakṣa q. v.

—gaṁgā N. of the river Narmadā.

—codita a. 1. aforesaid, above-mentioned. —2. previously stated or

advanced (as an objection).

—ja a. 1. born or produced before or formerly, first-produced,

first-born. —2. ancient, old. —3. eastern. (

—jaḥ) 1 an elder brother; Śi. 6. 44; R. 15. 36. —2. the son of the

elder wife. —3. an ancestor, a forefather: sa pūrvajānāṁ kapilena roṣāt R.

16. 34. —4. (pl.) the progenitors of mankind. —5. the Manes living in the

world of the moon. (

—jā) an elder sister.

—janman n. a former birth. (—m.) an elder brother; R. 14. 44; 15.

95.

—jātiḥ f. a former birth.

—jñānaṁ knowledge of a former life.

—dakṣiṇa a. south-eastern. (

—ṇā) the south-east.

—dikpatiḥ Indra, the regent of the east.

—dina the forenoon.

—diś f. the east.

—diśya a. situated towards the east, eastern.

—diṣṭaṁ the award of destiny.

—devaḥ 1. an ancient deity. —2. a demon or Asura. —3. a

progenitor (pitṛ). —4. (dual) an epithet of Nara-Nārāyaṇa.

—devatā a progenitor (pitṛ) of gods or of men: akrodhanāḥ

śaucaparāḥ satataṁ brahmacāriṇaḥ . nyastaśastrā mahābhāgāḥ pitaraḥ

pūrvadevatāḥ … —deśaḥ the eastern country, or the eastern part of India.

—nipātaḥ the irregular priority of a word in a compound; cf.

paranipāta —pakṣaḥ 1. the fore-part or side. —2. the first half of a lunar

month. —3. the first part of an argument, the prima facie argument or

view of a question. —4. the first objection to an argument. —5. the

statement of the plaintiff. —6. a suit at law. —7. an assertion, a

proposition. -pādaḥ the plaint, the first stage of a legal proceeding.

—padaṁ the first member of a compound or sentence.

—parvataḥ the eastern mountain behind which the sun is supposed

to rise.

—pāṁcālaka a. belonging to the eastern Panchālas.

—pāṇinīyāḥ (m. pl.) the disciples of Pāṇini living in the east.

—pālin m. an epithet of Indra.

—pitāmahaḥ a forefather, an ancestor.

—puruṣaḥ 1. an epithet of Brahmā. —2. any one of the first three

ancestors, beginning with the father (pitṛ, pitāmaha, and prapitāmaha);

Pt. 1. 89. —3. an ancestor in general.

—pūrva a. each preceding one. (

—rvāḥ) m. pl. forefathers.

—phalgunī the eleventh lunar mansion containing two stars —

bhavaḥ an epithet of the planet Jupiter.

—bhāgaḥ 1. the forepart. —2. the upper part.

—bhā (bha) drapadā the twenty fifth lunar mansion containing two

stars.

—bhāvaḥ 1. priority. —2. prior or antecedent existence; yena

sahaiva yasya yaṁ prati pūvabhāvo’vagamyate Tarka K. —3. (Rhet.)

disclosing an inten tion.

—bhāṣin a. willing to speak first; hence polite, courteous.

—bhuktiḥ f. prior occupation or possession.

—bhūta a. preceding, previous.

—mīmāṁsā ‘the prior or first Mīmāmsā’, an inquiry into the first or

ritual portion of the Veda, as opposed to the uttaramīmāṁsā or vedāṁta;

see mīmāṁsā. —raṁgaḥ the commencement or prelude of a drama, the

prologue; yannāṭyavastunaḥ pūrvaṁ raṁgavighnopaśāṁtaye . kuśīlavāḥ

prakurvaṁti pūrvaraṁgaḥ sa ucyate .. D. R.; pūrvaragaṁ vidhāyaiva

sūtradhāro nivartate S. D. 283; pūrvaraṁgaḥ prasaṁgāya nāṭakīyasya

vastunaḥ Śi. 2. 8 (see Malli. thereon).

—rāgaḥ the dawning or incipient love, love between two persons

which springs (from some previous cause) before their meeting;

śravaṇāddarśanādvāpi mithaḥ saṁrūḍharāgayoḥ . daśāviśeṣo’yo prāptau

pūrvarāga sa ucyate … S. D. 214.

—rātraḥ the first part of the night.

—rūpaṁ 1. indication of an approaching change. —2. a symptom of

occurring disease. —3. the first of two concurrent vowels or consonants

that is retained. —4. (in Rhet.) a figure of speech which consists in

describing anything as suddenly resuming its former state.

—lakṣaṇaṁ a symptom of coming sickness.

—vayas a. young. (—n.) youth.

—vartin a. existing before, prior, previous.

—vādaḥ the first plea or commencement of an action at law.

—vādin m. the complainant or plaintiff.

—vṛttaṁ 1. a former event; R. 11. 10. —2. previous conduct.

—vairin a. one who first commences hostilities, an aggressor.

—śārada a. relating to the first half of autumn.

—śailaḥ see pūrvaparvata. —sakthaṁ the upper part of the thigh.

—saṁdhyā daybreak, dawn; Śi. 11. 40.

—sara a. going in front.

—sāgaraḥ the eastern ocean; R. 4. 32.

—sāhasaḥ the first or heaviest of the three fines.

—sthitiḥ f. former or first state.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

pūrva (pūrba AK. 3, 4, 21, 136. MED. b. 6 und auch sonst) 1) adj. (f. ā)

mit pronom. Decl.; abl. auch pūrvāt, loc. auch pūrve, nom. pl. auch

pūrvās gaṇa sarvādi zu P. 1, 1, 27. P. 7, 1, 16. 1, 1, 34. VOP. 3, 9. 12. 37.

mit einem abl. verbunden P. 2, 3, 29. VOP. 5, 21. mit seinem subst.

componirt P. 2, 1, 58. a) «der vordere; östlich» (pūrvā sc. diś «Osten»)

AK. 3, 4, 21, 136. H. 167. an. 2, 532. MED. b. 6. HALĀY. 1, 101.

yasminbrahmā rājani pūrva eti ṚV. 4, 50, 8. rathaṁ pūrvaṁ karadaparaṁ

jūjuvāṁsam 5, 31, 11. Fuss AV. 10, 4, 3. Zitzen TBR. 2, 1, 8, 1.

kaniṣṭhapūrvāḥ ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 4, 15, 8. KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 2, 4.

pūrvapaścājjaṅghādideśau AK. 2, 8, 2, 8. H. 1228. subst. «Vordertheil»:

pūrvaṁ kāyasya P. 2, 2, 1, Sch. anavaratadhanurjyāsphālanakrūrapūrva

(gātra) ŚĀK. 37. nāsā- TRIK. 2, 8, 37. instr. pl. fem. etwa «vorn,

vorwärts»: pra pūrvābhistirate rāṣṭi śūraḥ ṚV. 1, 104, 4. 5, 48, 2. pūrvam

«voran» ĪŚOP. 4, R. 6, 1, 8. — pūrve ardhe rajasaḥ «östlich» ṚV. 1, 92, 1.

AV. 11, 2, 25. 5, 6. ŚAT. BR. 10, 6, 4, 1. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 4, 3. 4, 7, 19.

uttara- 5, 9, 20. 8, 5, 5. dakṣiṇa- 4, 7, 10. 25, 13, 31. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 4, 4.

pūrvo yajamānāt «östlich von» LĀTY. 4, 10, 25. tīra SUND. 2, 12. samudra

(vgl. pūrvasamudra, -sāgara, pūrvāmbudhi) M. 2, 22. diś MBH. 5, 3762.

3768. R. 1, 65, 1. ŚATR. 14, 128. SIDDH. K. zu P. 1, 1, 28. -yāyin

SŪRYAS. 1, 29. 54. pūrvapaścimā 3, 4. pūrvapaścāyatāvetau MĀRK. P.

54, 24. paścimottarapūrvaiḥ (puradvāraiḥ) M. 5, 92. vijitya pṛthivīṁ

sarvāṁ sa pūrvāparadakṣiṇām MBH. 3, 15255. — b) «früher, vorherig,

vorhergehend vor» (abl.); «all, herkömmlich, bisherig»; pl. subst. «die

Alten, Altvordern» (Gegens. apara, avara, upara, uttara, paścima,

navyaṁs, nūtna, dvitīya); = ādi, ādya, agra, pūrvaja AK. 3, 2, 30. 3, 4, 21,

136. H. 1459. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 4, 22. tānpūrvayā nividā hūmahe

vayam ṚV. 1, 89, 3. 96, 2. pūrvā viśvasmādbhuvanādabodhi 123, 2. āsāṁ

pūrvāsāmahasu svasṝṇāmaparā pūrvāmabhyeti paścāt 124, 9. 126, 5.

141, 5. jaritāraḥ 175, 6. karaṇāni 4, 19, 10. mānuṣātpūrvaḥ 2, 3, 3.

pitaraḥ 6, 22, 2. ṛṣayaḥ 7, 29, 4. 5, 25, 2. na te pūrve madhavannāparāso

na vīryaṁ1 nūtanaḥ kaścanāpa 42, 6. pūrvaḥ pūrvo yajamāno vanīyān 5,

77, 2. 6, 69, 6. 7, 22, 9. 8, 20, 15. 27, 10. 10, 15, 2. agneḥ pūrve bhrātaro

arthametamanvāvarīvuḥ 10, 51, 6. AV. 9, 5, 27. 10, 3, 3. 11, 5, 5. VS. 13,

31. 31, 20. rākāṁ pūrvāṁ śaṁset AIT. BR. 3, 37. 6, 20. 7, 33. ŚAT. BR. 1,

6, 1, 3. na pūrve nāpare janāḥ 13, 5, 4, 14. 12, 1, 3, 23. 3, 5, 1. 14, 4, 2,

2. 7, 1, 1. 9, 1, 10. KĀTY. ŚR. 2, 8, 1. 1, 1. 9, 13, 3. M. 1, 10. asamṛddhi

4, 137. -bhukti 8, 252. HIḌ. 3, 18. MBH. 5, 1063. R. 1, 25, 9. 31, 3. janana

KUMĀRAS. 1, 54. nāsamīkṣya paraṁ sthānaṁ pūrvamāyatanaṁ tyajet

Spr. 905. ŚĀK. 41, 11. -cintana RĀJA-TAR. 5, 200. abde pūrve AK. 3, 5,

20. saṁdhyā M. 2, 101. fgg. 4, 93. MBH. 1, 657. pūrve manīṣiṇaḥ M. 2,

89. 3, 37. 9, 267. BHAG. 4, 15. MBH. 1, 7178. RAGH. 1, 4. KATHĀS. 4, 10.

dhriyamāṇe tu pitari pūrveṣāṁ nirvapet M. 3, 220. R. 1, 42, 2. 2, 2, 4. 73,

17. 18. RAGH. 1, 67. 5, 14. ŚĀK. 49. KATHĀS. 32, 116. MĀRK. P. 21, 92.

matpūrvaiḥ puruṣaiḥ kṛtam «die vor mir gelebt haben» 133, 14. matpūrvaḥ

«mein älterer Bruder» R. GORR. 2, 93, 14. māsena pūrvaḥ und

māsapūrvaḥ «um einen Monat früher» P. 2, 1, 31. SIDDH. K. zu P. 1, 1,

30. pūrvasmiñchūnye devagṛhe «in dem früher leeren Tempel» VID. 171.

In comp. mit dem praed., das seinen Accent bewahrt, P. 6, 2, 22. āḍhya-,

darśanīya- «der früher reich, hübsch war», Sch. strī- «der früher ein Weib

gewesen ist» MBH. 5, 5939. 6, 4483. 4967 (wo wohl -pūrvaḥ zu lesen ist).

Ueberaus häufig nach einem partic. praet. pass.: dṛṣṭa- «früher gesehen»

N. 1, 13. 28. 23, 7. MBH. 2, 2344. R. 1, 9, 21. 3, 49, 25. 52, 36. adṛṣṭa- N.

16, 22. R. 1, 9, 27. MṚCCH. 90, 11. śruta- R. GORR. 1, 69, 22. ŚĀK. 95, 5.

ukta- R. 1, 58, 19. vanaṁ na gatapūrvaṁ te SĀV. 4, 20. pariṇīta- ŚĀK. 65,

23. ūḍha- 79, 15. 110, 17. carita- 96. aparijñāta- MBH. 13, 1591.

anāsvādita- R. 1, 9, 36. RAGH. 3, 54. ānamita- 11, 72. kṛta- HIT. ed.

JOHNS. I, 114. vidita- PRAB. 91, 6. na nivartitapūrvaśca

kadācidraṇamūrdhani MBH. 5, 7311. bhūta- P. 5, 3, 53. 6, 2, 22. ARJ. 8,

21. BRĀHMAṆ. 1, 22. ajantabhūtapūrva P. 3, 1, 97, Sch. abhūta- R. 1, 9,

20. pītasomapūrva M. 11, 8. — compar. pūrvatara ṚV. 1, 113, 11. kāla

MBH. 5, 3768. abde pūrve pūrvatare yati AK. 3, 5, 20. pūrvataraḥ

kaścitsakhā BHĀG. P. 4, 28, 51. pitāmahāḥ pūrvatarāśca teṣām R. GORR.

2, 118, 30. tvatto janāḥ pūrvatare R. SCHL. 2, 109, 34. — pūrvam adv.

«vormals, früher, zuerst, zuvor, vorher»: yamu pūrvamāhuve tamidaṁ

huve ṚV. 2, 37, 2. 1, 30, 9. AV. 4, 35, 2. 37, 1. 8, 1, 10. AIT. BR. 3, 32. M.

8, 354. fg. BRĀHMAṆ. 1, 20. MBH. 2, 1423. R. 1, 1, 22. SŪRYAS. 1, 44.

RAGH. 4, 2. ŚĀK. 82, 9. 143. KATHĀS. 2, 68. 32, 172. MĀRK. P. 62, 15.

PAÑCAT. 45, 2. pūrvaṁ hyapi sakhā me ‘si (praes.!) saṁbandhī ca

janādhipa. ata ūrdhvaṁ tu bhūyastvaṁ prītimāhartumarhasi.. N. 25, 11.

kālāgninā yathā pūrvaṁ trailokyaṁ dahyate ‘khilam R. 1, 65, 16. padmo

nāma nidhiḥ pūrvaṁ mayasya bhavati MĀRK. P. 68, 8. taṁ

pūrvamabhivādayet M. 2, 117. 3, 94. 204. YĀJÑ. 1, 247. R. 2, 72, 9. ahaṁ

pūrvamahaṁ pūrvamityanyo’nyaṁ nijaghnatuḥ SUND. 4, 18. MBH. 7,

1807. PAÑCAT. 51, 18. H. 318. pūrvaṁ doṣānabhikhyāpya M. 8, 205.

pūrvaṁ bhojaṁ (oder bhuktvā) vrajati P. 3, 4, 24. pūrvam — tatas M. 2,

60. 5, 139. SĀV. 3, 13. R. 1, 12, 21. ŚĀK. 189. pūrvam — paścāt 179. M. 4,

125. pūrvam — upari Spr. 2351. pūrvam — adhunā 2831. pūrvam — adya

ŚĀK. 184. adya pūrvam «bis jetzt» R. 1, 32, 8. pūrvam mit dem abl. «vor»

KAṬHOP. 4, 6. BRĀHMAṆ. 2, 22. jyeṣṭhābhigamanāt RAGH. 12, 35. am

Ende eines comp. «nach»: devatātithipūrvaṁ («so dass Götter und Gäste

vorangehen») ca sadā prāśnīta vāgyataḥ MBH. 14, 1272. pitṛpūrvaṁ

visarjayet (v. l. visarjanam) YĀJÑ. 1, 246 («nachdem er vorher die Väter

angerufen» STENZLER). Das adv. ohne Flexionszeichen häufig am

Anfange eines comp. vor einem adj., namentlich vor einem partic. praet.

pass.: pūrvāpakārin R. 2, 97, 25; vgl. -kārin, -kṛt u. s. w. pūrvokta M. 2,

185. 3, 256. 7, 200. -codita 3, 26. 8, 160. pūrvacoditatva PĀR. GṚHY. 2,

17. — M. 6, 15. 8, 37. 9, 87. 281. MBH. 14, 524. R. 1, 31, 21. R. GORR. 1,

70, 13. ŚĀK. 172. KUMĀRAS. 7, 47. KATHĀS. 25, 182. 32, 26. PAÑCAT.

20, 7. 129, 1. pūrvānubhūta Schol. zu CAURAP. Einl. compar. pūrvataram

BHAG. 4, 15. sa dadarśa sītāṁ sītā ca taṁ pūrvataraṁ dadarśa «hatte ihn

früher erblickt» R. 3, 48, 19. — c) «der erste in der Reihenfolge»: sāhasa

so v. a. «die niedrigste Strafe» M. 8, 120. 121. 276. 9, 281. dama 287.

trayaścāśramiṇaḥ pūrve (nach KULL. der brahmacārin, gṛhastha und

vānaprastha) 12, 114. — d) «vorhergehend, früher» so v. v. a. «zuerst

genannt, — ausgesprochen u.s.w.» (Laut, Wort); Gegens. uttara M. 10, 68.

HIT. I, 8. P. 8, 2, 104. Kār. zu P. 4, 1, 18. H. 17. pūrva — para P. 6, 1, 84.

pūrvaṁ pūrvaṁ vivarjayet M. 2, 184. 7, 52. 9, 295. 10, 114.

pūrvapūrvatamābhāve MBH. 1, 4674. -vidhi P. 1, 1, 57.

pūrvottarasūtrayoḥ P. 1, 4, 106, Sch. pūrvataraśloke KULL. zu M. 1, 20.

pūrvākṣara M. 2, 125. dīrghaplutayoḥ pūrvā mātrā AV. PRĀT. 1, 38. 56.

alo ‘ntyātpūrva upadhā P. 1, 1, 65. Vārtt. zu P. 1, 1, 46. 47. sarvaṁ

pūrvam «alle vorangehenden Wörter» AK. 2, 9, 9. nāmi- «dem ein» Nāmin

«vorangeht» ṚV. PRĀT. 1, 20. 21. 2, 10. gajapūrva «Elephanten» d. i. «der

Zahl acht vorangehend» so v. a. «der siebente» ŚRUT. 13. pūrve «die

folgenden Wörter» AK. 2, 6, 2, 7. puṇyaḥ śabdo muniriti kevalaṁ

rājapūrvaḥ «wenn» rājan «ihm vorangeht» ŚĀK. 47. daśapūrvaratha d. i.

daśaratha RAGH. 8, 29. jñā ityetasmādanupūrvāt P. 1, 3, 58, Sch. AK. 3,

6, 2, 16. 8, 43. pūrvam adv.: sravatyanoṁkṛtaṁ pūrvaṁ parastācca

viśīryate M. 2, 74. bhavatpūrvaṁ caredbhaikṣamupanīto dvijottamaḥ.

bhavanmadhyaṁ tu rājanyo vaiśyastu bhavaduttaram.. «so dass mit» bha-

«die Rede beginnt» 49. — e) am Ende adjectivischer Compp. erblasst bei

pūrva häufig die Bedeutung «des Frühern, Vorangehenden» und das Wort

lässt sich hier durch «begleitet von, verbunden mit» (vgl. puraskṛta unter

puras, und puraskāra) wiedergeben; auch werden solche Composita mit

der Endung des acc. oft als Adverbia gebraucht.

saṁbandhamābhāṣaṇapūrvamāhuḥ «man sagt, die Freundschaft beginne

mit einem Gespräche», RAGH. 2, 58. Hier hat pūrva noch seine

ursprüngliche Bedeutung; so auch in bahumānapūrvā saparyā «auf

Hochachtung beruhend» KUMĀRAS. 5, 31 und saṁskārapūrvaṁ grahaṇaṁ

śruteḥ AK. 2, 7, 40. H. 842. Dagegen ist mṛdupūrvā vāk einfach «eine

freundliche Rede» N. 11, 32. mṛdupūrvaṁ ca bhāṣate so v. a. «freundlich»

R. 2, 1, 8. N. 22, 2. prītipūrvam MBH. 1, 5135. smitapūrvaṁ vaco ‘bravīt

INDR. 4, 5. HIḌ. 2, 23. smitapūrvābhibhāṣin N. 3, 19. Spr. 2769.

KUMĀRAS. 7, 47. uvāca madhuraṁ vākyaṁ sāntvapūrvāmadaṁ śanaiḥ

HIḌ. 4, 26. upāyapūrva ārambhaḥ AK. 3, 4, 23, 142. praṇāmapūrvam

KATHĀS. 2, 52. tatra nāmānvayākhyānapūrvaṁ caitāmadarśayat 29, 32.

pradānapūrvaṁ saṁtoṣya tām «mit einem Geschenke» 3, 56. yadi vā

buddhipūrvāṇi yadyabuddhyāpi kānicit. mayā kṛtānyakāryāṇi «mit oder

ohne Wissen» N. 25, 9. R. 2, 22, 8. matipūrvam (Gegens. ajñānāt) M. 11,

146. abodhapūrvam «ohne Wissen» ŚĀK. 99. vadho jñānapūrvakṛtaḥ DAŚ.

2, 22. M. 12, 89. vidhi- R. 1, 11, 17. aprekṣāpūrvakārin RĀJA-TAR. 4, 610.

aprekṣāpūrvakāritā 58. sā galamoṭanapūrvaṁ vināśitā ŚUK. in LA. 43, 1.

mṛdupūrveṇa = mṛdupūrvam MBH. 4, 119. tryabdapūrva entspricht

daśābdākhya M. 2, 134. hayapūrveṇa karmaṇā so v. a. hayamedhena R.

1, 11, 9. putrikāpūrvapūtrāḥ sind wohl «Söhne durch Vermittelung einer»

putrikā MBH. 13, 1591. gaṇa- (u. d. Worte falsch erklärt) wohl «zu einer

Körperschaft gehörend» ebend. strī- (bedeutet auch «früher Weib

gewesen»; s. u. b) wohl «der viel mit Weibern zu thun hat» oder «sich von

seinem Weibe beherrschen lässt» 1593. sakhipūrva n. scheint «das Jmd-

Freund-Nennen, Freundschaft» zu bedeuten: na daridro vasumato

nāvidvānviduṣaḥ sakhā. na śūrasya sakhā klīvaḥ sakhipūrvaṁ kimiṣyate

MBH. 1, 5142. 5144. tato drupadamāgamya sakhipūrvamahaṁ prabho.

abruvaṁ puruṣavyāghra sakhāyaṁ (so ist zu lesen st. sakhā ‘yaṁ) viddhi

māmiti.. 5194; hier ist das Wort adv. «ich sprach ihn mit ‘Freund’ an.» — f)

fehlerhafte Variante für pūrṇa «voll, ganz» SVĀMIN zu AK. 3, 2, 15. ŚKDR.

— 2) m. N. pr. eines Fürsten BHĀG. P. 9, 2, 19. — 3) f. ā a) «Osten»; s. u.

1,a. Bez. «des im Osten von» Madhyadeśa «gelegenen Landes» LIA. I, 93.

— b) zusammenfassende Bezeichnung der Nakshatra pūrvaphālgunī,

pūrvāṣāḍhā und pūrvabhadrapadāḥ -traya VARĀH. BṚH. S. 15, 28. 97, 8.

-yukte niśākare WEBER, GJOT. 34. — 4) n. a) «eine best. grosse Zahl von

Jahren» H. 133; vgl. den Schol. und COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 208. — b) N.

der «ältesten» Schriften der Jaina, deren 14 aufgezählt werden, H. 247.

fg. = śrutibheda H. an. — c) N. eines Tantra Verz. d. Oxf. H. 109,a,14. —

Nach gaṇa ardharcādi zu P. 2, 4, 31 ist pūrva m. und n. Das Wort ist wohl

etymologisch verwandt mit purā, puras. Vgl. a-, anu-, abhi-, uttara-,

yathāpūrvam; pūrveṇa s. besonders.

pūrva 1) e) Sp. 843, Z. 3 v. u. vgl. janaughaṁ vipramukhyānāṁ

vittapūrvaṁ «(reich beschenkt)» visṛjya R. 7, 99, 5. Sp. 844, Z. 5. fgg.

NĪLAK. zu MBH. 13, 1591. fgg.: asyāmutpannaḥ putro madīya iti

niyamena yā dīyate tasyāṁ ca yo jātaḥ sa putrikāpūrvaputraḥ; gaṇapūrvā

grāmaṇyaḥ (vgl. oben u. gaṇapūrva); strīpūrvāḥ strījitāḥ strīpaṇyopajīvino

vā. Z. 9. fg. NĪLAK.: pūrvaṁ sakhā iti sakhipūrvaṁ jīrṇaṁ sakhyam. — 4)

b) vgl. WILSON, Sel. Works 1, 285. 303.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

pūrva pūrva, i. e. pura + va (see purā), also pārba, adj., f. vā (bā).

1. Fore, Śāk. d. 37.

2. Former, prior, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 905.

3. First, Man. 1, 10.

4. Lowest, Man. 8, 120.

5. Eastern, Man. 2, 22.

II. adv. vam.

1. Before, Chr. 3, 2; first, Pañc. 51, 18.

2. Formerly, Chr. 16, 20.

3. Immemorially, Man. 9, 87.

III. pūrveṇa, instr. adv. To the east, Rām. 2, 70, 11.

IV. An ancestor, Pañc. iii. d. 216; Man. 3, 220.

V. f. vā, The cast.

— Comp. a-, adj. 1. new, Pañc. ii. d. 16; unknown, 68, 13. 2.

incomparable. a-dṛṣṭa- (vb. dṛś),

I. adj. not seen before, Rām. 5, 54, 3. adya-, adv. till to-day, Rām. 1, 32,

8. an-āmaya-praśna-, adv. after having inquired for a person’s health.

anya-, f. vā, a woman previously promised to one and married to another.

a-bodha-, adv. without having perceived before, Śāk. d. 99. aham-, adj.

desiring to be the first, Rām. 2, 12, 92. tri-abda-, adv. less than three

years, Man. 2, 134. dakṣiṇa-, adj., f. vā, south-eastern. pava-, f. a woman

formerly married, having belonged formerly to another man, Chr. 6. 8.

pūrva-pūrva,

I. adj. every preceding one.

II. m. pl. ancestors, MBh. 3, 12408. bhūta-, adj. prior; °vam, adv.

formerly. a-bhūta-, adj. not having existed before. mṛdu-, adj. mild,

friendly. adv. mildly, gently at first, Rām. 2, 1, 8. yathā-pūrvam, adv. 1. as

before, Pañc. 36, 18. 2. formerly. 3. in order or succession. sakhi-, adj.

more excellent than a friend, MBh. 1, 5142. strī-, one who has been

before a wife. smita-, adv. smiling first.

— Cf. pūrvedyus.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

pūrva a. being before (sp. & t.), fore, first, eastern, to the east of (abl.);

prior, preceding, ancient, previous to, earlier than (abl. or —°, often °— or

—° w. pp. in the sense of an adv., e.g. pūrvokta or uktapūrva spoken

before or already); accompanied by, following; with, under, according to

(—°); w. vayas n. youth; w. āyus n. old age. —m. elder brother, pl. the

ancestors or ancients. f. pūrvā (±diś) the east. n. forepart, as adv. in

front, before (as prep. w. abl.), first, previously, already, long since; —°

accompanied by etc. (cf. adj. —°). pūrva uttara former-latter, n. adv.

first-last; adya pūrvam until now, hitherto.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

pūrva pūr-va, a. being in front, fore; fronting, eastern; being to the east

of (ab.); preceding; former, earlier; prior to (ab. or -°); ancient,

traditional, of the olden time; first (in succession); lowest (fine);

previously or first mentioned or named; very commonly -° after a pp. =

previously or before (e. g. dṛṣṭa-pūrva, seen before);

e vayasi, in youth; -° a. having as the preceding thing = preceded or

accompanied by, based on, with: -m, ad. before, beforehand, previously,

already; first; formerly, long ago (sts. with pr.); -° (also pūrveṇa), in

accordance with, amid, after, with (or when the privative negation

precedes = without); m. pl. the ancient, forefathers, ancestors; sg. elder

brother; n. fore part;

ā, f. east.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

pūrva ka niketane . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (curā°para°-nimantraṇe saka

°-nivāse aka°-seṭ .) ṣaṣṭhasvarī . niketanamiha nimantraṇaṁ nivāso vā .

ka, pūrbayati dvijān bhoktuṁ gṛhī . pūrbayati tīrtheṣu sādhuḥ . iti

durgādāsaḥ .. vargyabānto’yam ..

pūrva ka niketane . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (curā°paraṁ0-nimantraṇe

saka°-nivāse aka°-seṭ .) ṣaṣṭhasvarī . niketanamiha nimantraṇaṁ nivāso

vā . ka, pūrvayati dbijān bhoktuṁ gṛhī . pūrvayati tīrtheṣu sādhuḥ . iti

durgādāsaḥ .. antyavānto’yam ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

pūrva nimantraṇe saka° nivāse aka° cu° ubha° seṭ . pūrbayati te

apupūrbat ta . oṣṭhyānto’yam .

pūrva nivāse aka° nimantraṇe saka° bhvā° pa° seṭa . antyasthānto’yam .

pūrvati apūrvīt .

pūrva(rva) tri° pūrba (rva)—ac . 1 prathame ādye yasyāṁ diśi yeṣāṁ

sūryasya prathamaṁ dṛṣṭiḥ teṣāṁ tasyāṁ 2 diśi strī tadupalakṣite 3 deśe

yasya yadapekṣayā prathamaṁ janmādi tasya 4 tādṛśakāle 5

tadupalakṣite ca . tasya digdeśakālavyavasthāvācitve sarvanāmakāryaṁ

pūrvasmai ityādi jasi ṅiṅasyostu vā pūrbe pūrbāḥ pūrbasmāt pūrvāt pūrba

pūrbasmin . striyāṁ tu na vibhāṣā pūrbasyai ṣūrbasyām ityādi .

sarvanāmatvena vṛttimātre’sya puṁvadbhāvaḥ . pūrbasyāṁ sthitaṁ

pūrbasthitam . pūrbasyā rūpaṁ pūrbarūpam ityādi .

भुजंग — bhujaṁga Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899bhujaṁga «bhuja-ṁ-ga» see «bhujaṁga» and «bhujaṁgama».

bhujaṁga m. (fr. «bhujam» ind. p. of «bhuj» + «ga») a serpent, snake,

serpent-demon

m. N. of the number eight

m. the paramour of a prostitute

m. the dissolute friend of a prince

m. any constant companion of a prince

m. a lover (see «pṛthivī-bh-«), the keeper of a prostitute

m. a species of Daṇḍaka metre

m. N. of a man

bhujaṁga m. (prob. n.) tin or lead

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

bhujaṁga (bhujam, absol. von 1. bhuj, + 1. ga) m. a) = bhujaga

«Schlange» AK. 1, 2, 1, 7. TRIK. 3, 3, 65. H. 1303. an. 3, 129. MED. g. 45.

HALĀY. 3, 18. 22. DAŚ. 1. 18. SUŚR. 1, 333, 18. 2, 532, 1. RAGH. 1, 80.

LA. (II) 89, 22. DHŪRTAS. 92, 11. KĀVYĀD. 2, 188. 346. abhujaṁgavant

322. bhujaṁgī f. «ein Schlangenweibchen, Schlangenjungfrau» MBH. 4,

258. KATHĀS. 33, 65. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 108. kuṇḍalinī Verz. d. Oxf. H.

235,a,26. — b) Bez. «der Zahl acht» SŪRYAS. 1, 32. 2, 15. — c) «der

Liebhaber einer Buhldirne» TRIK. H. 519. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 227.

vāravilāsinī- SĀH. D. 8, 13. yā bhujaṁgabhogasaktacittā Ind. St. 8, 370,

8. KĀVYĀD. 2, 346. «der liederliche Gefährte eines Fürsten» 188.

abhujaṁgavant 322. — d) «ein best.» Daṇḍaka-«Metrum» Ind. St. 8, 408.

fg. — e) N. pr. eines Mannes RĀJA-TAR. 7, 91. — 2) f. ī a)

«Schlangenweibchen» s. u. 1,a. — b) «ein best. Strauch», = sarpiṇī NIGH.

PR.: vgl. bhujagī. — 3) n. «ein best. Metall», viell. «Blei» (vgl.

bhujaṁgama) Verz. d. B. H. No. 969. — Vgl. bhaujaṁga.

bhujaṁga 1) c) DAŚAK. in BENF. Chr. 191, 9.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

bhujaṁga bhujaṁga, 1. bhuj + a + m-ga,

I. m.

1. A snake, Bhartṛ. 2, 4; Vikr. 25, 20.

2. A catamite, Daśak. in Chr. 191, 10.

II. f. gī, A female snake.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

bhujaṁga m. = bhujaga, lecher, parasite.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

bhujaṁga bhujaṁ-ga, m. (moving in curves), snake, serpent, paramour,

gallent; dissolute friend of a prince; constant companion of a prine; N.: ī,

f. female serpent;

a-kanyā, f. young female serpent;

-prayāta, n. serpent’s gait; a. metre;

-bhojin, m. devourer of serpents, ep. of Garuḍa.

भुजंगः — bhujaṁgaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

bhujaṁgaḥ [bhujaḥ san gacchati gam-khac mum ḍicca]

(1) A serpent, snake; bhujagaṁmapi kopinaṁ śirasi

puṣpavaddhārayet Bh. 2. 4.

(2) A paramour, gallant; abhūmireṣā bhujaṁgabhaṁgibhāṣitānāṁ K.

196.

(3) A husband or lord in general.

(4) A catamite.

(5) The dissolute friend of a king.

(6) The constellation āśleṣā.

(7) The number ‘eight’.

— Comp.

—iṁdraḥ an epithet of Śeṣa, the lord of snakes.

—īśaḥ an epithet of 1. Vāsuki. —2. of Śeṣa. —3. of Patanjali. —4. of

the sage Pingala.

—kanyā a young female snake.

—bhaṁ the asterism āśleṣa. —bhuj m. 1. an epithet of 1. Garuḍa.

—2. a peacock.

—latā betel-pepper (tāṁbūlī). —han m. an epithet of Garuḍa; see

bhujagāṁtaka &c.

भुजंगम — bhujaṁgama Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899bhujaṁgama «bhuja-ṁ-gama» see «bhujaṁga» and «bhujaṁgama».

bhujaṁgama («bhujaṁ-gama») m. a serpent, serpent-demon ; N. of the

number eight ; of Rāhu ; of a Nāga ; («ā») f. a female serpent, a

serpent-maid ; n. lead

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

bhujaṁgama (bhujam, absol. von 1. bhuj, + gama) 1) m. a) = bhujaṁga

«Schlange» VOP. 26, 60. 61. AK. 1, 2, 1, 7. H. 1303. HALĀY. 3, 18. SUŚR.

2, 533, 5. Spr. 811. f. -gamā «Schlangenweibchen, ein weiblicher

Schlangendämon» MBH. 1, 1898. 7798. — b) Bez. «der Zahl acht»

SŪRYAS. 12, 87. — c) Bein. Rāhu’s Ind. St. 2, 261. — d) N. pr. eines Nāga

VYUTP. 87. — 2) n. «Blei» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

bhujaṁgama bhujaṁgama, i. e. 1. bhuj + a + m-gam + a, m. A snake,

Pañc. 174, 11; Bhartṛ. 2, 87.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

bhujaṁgama m. = bhujaga.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

bhujaṁgama bhujaṁ-gama, m. (moving in curves), serpent, snake: ā, f.

female snake;

a indra, m. lord of serpents;

-īśa, m. id., ep. of Piṅgala.

भुजंगमः — bhujaṁgamaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

bhujaṁgamaḥ

(1) A snake.

(2) An epithet of Rāhu.

(3) The number ‘eight’.

(4) The constellation āśleṣā. —mī A female snake. —maṁ Lead.

वसु — vasu Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vasu mf («u» or «vī») n. (for 2. see p.932, col.3) excellent, good,

beneficent

mf («u» or «vī») n. sweet

mf («u» or «vī») n. dry

mf («u» or «vī») n. N. of the gods (as the «good or bright ones», esp. of

the ādityas, Maruts, Aśvins, Indra, Ushas, Rudra, Vāyu, Viṣṇu, śiva, and

Kubera)

mf («u» or «vī») n. of a partic. class of gods (whose number is usually

eight, and whose chief is Indra, later Agni and Viṣṇu; they form one of

the nine Gaṇas or classes enumerated under Gaṇa-devatā q.v.; the eight

Vasus were originally personifications, like other Vedic deities, of natural

phenomena, and are usually mentioned with the other Gaṇas common in

the Veda, viz. the eleven Rudras and the twelve ādiyas, constituting with

them and with Dyaus, «eaven», and Pṛithivī, «Earth» [or, according to

some, with Indra and Prajā-pati, or, according to others, with the two

Aśvins], the thirty-three gods to which reference is frequently made; the

names of the Vasus, according to the Viṣṇu-Purāṇa, are, 1. āpa

[connected with «ap», «water»]; 2. Dhruva, «the Pole-star; 3. Soma, «the

Moon»; 4. Dhava or Dhara; 5. Anila, «Wind»; 6. Anala or Pāvaka, «Fire»; 7.

Pratyusha, «the Dawn»; 8. Prabhāsa, «Light»; but their names are

variously given; Ahan, «Day», being sometimes substituted for 1; in their

relationship to Fire and Light they appear to belong to Vedic rather than

Purānic mythology) &c. &c.

mf («u» or «vī») n. a symbolical N. of the number «eight»

mf («u» or «vī») n. a ray of light

mf («u» or «vī») n. a partic. ray of light

vasu mf («u» or «vī») n. = «jina» (only the sun; the moon; fire; a rope,

thong; a tree; N. of two kinds of plant = «baka» and «pīta-madgu»; a lake,

pond; a kind of fish; the the of the yoke of a plough; the distance from

the elbow to the closed fist)

mf («u» or «vī») n. N. of a Rishi (with the patr. Bharad-vāja, author of ,

reckoned among the seven sages)

mf («u» or «vī») n. of a son of Manu

mf («u» or «vī») n. of a son of Uttāna-pāda

mf («u» or «vī») n. of a prince of the Cedis also called Upari-cara

mf («u» or «vī») n. of a son of īlina

mf («u» or «vī») n. of a son of Kuśa and the country called after him

mf («u» or «vī») n. of a son of Vasu-deva

mf («u» or «vī») n. of a son of Kṛiṣṇa

mf («u» or «vī») n. of a son of Vatsara

mf («u» or «vī») n. of a son of Hiraṇya-retas and the Varsha ruled by

him

mf («u» or «vī») n. of a son of Bhūtajyotis

mf («u» or «vī») n. of a son of Naraka

mf («u» or «vī») n. of a king of Kaśmīra

vasu mf («u» or «vī») n. («u») f. light, radiance

mf («u» or «vī») n. a partic. drug

mf («u» or «vī») n. N. of a daughter of Daksha and mother of the Vasus

(as a class of gods) («vī») f. night

vasu n. (in Veda gen. «vasos, vasvas» and «vasunas»; also pl.,

exceptionally m.) wealth, goods, riches, property &c. &c. («vasoṣ-pati»

m. prob. «the god of wealth or property» [Paipp. «asoṣ-p-«, «the god of

life»]; «vasor-dhārā» f. «stream of wealth», N. of a partic. libation of Ghṛita

at the Agni-cayana &c.; of the wife of Agni ; of the heavenly Gaṅgā ; of

sacred bathing-place ; of a kind of vessel ; «-rā-prayoga» m. N. of wk.)

vasu n. gold (see «-varma-dhara»)

vasu n. a jewel, gem, pearl (see «-mekhala»)

vasu n. any valuable or precious object

vasu n. (also f.) a partic. drug

vasu n. a kind of salt (= «romaka»)

vasu n. water

vasu n. a horse (?)

vasu n. = «śyāma»

vasu m. or n. (for 1. see p.930, col.3) dwelling or dweller (see «saṁ-

vasu»).

vasu 1. 2. «vasu». see pp. 930 and 932.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

vasu a.

(1) Sweet.

(2) Dry.

(3) Ved. Wealthy, rich.

(4) Ved. Good. —n. [vas-un]

(1) Wealth, riches; svayaṁ pradugdhe’sya guṇairupasnutā

vasūpamānasya vasūni medi nī Ki. 1. 18; R. 8. 31, 9. 6.

(2) A jewel, gem.

(3) Gold.

(4) Water.

(5) A thing, substance.

(6) A kind of salt.

(7) A medicinal root (vṛddhi).

(8) A yellow kind of kidney-bean. —m.

(1) N. of a class of deities (usually pl. in this sense); seyaṁ

bhūrivasorvasoriva sutā mṛtyormukhe vartate Māl. 5. 24; Ki. 1. 18; (the

Vasus are eight in number: —1 āpa, 2 dhruva, 3 soma, 4 dhara or dhava,

5 anila, 6 anala, 7 pratyūṣa, and 8 prabhāsa; sometimes aha is

substituted for āpa; dharo dhruvaśca somaśca ahaścaivānilo’nalaḥ .

pratyūṣaśca prabhāsaśca vasavo’ṣṭaviti smṛtāḥ).

(2) The number ‘eight’.

(3) N. of Kubera.

(4) Of Śiva.

(5) Of Agni.

(6) A tree.

(7) A lake, pound.

(8) A rein.

(9) The tie of a yoke. (10) A halter.

(11) A ray of light; nirakāśayadravimapetavasuṁ

viyadālayādaparadiggaṇikā Śi. 9. 10; śithilavasumagādhe

magnamāpatpayodhau Ki. 1. 46 (in both cases vasu means ‘wealth’ also).

(12) The sun. —f.

(1) A ray of light.

(2) Light, radiance.

(3) A medicinal root (vṛddhi).

— Comp.

—aukasārā 1. N. of Amarāvatī, the city of Indra. —2. of Alakā, the

city of Kubera. —3. of a river attached to Amarāvatī and Alakā.

—kīṭaḥ, —kṛmiḥ a beggar.

—tātiḥ f. Ved. wealth.

—dā the earth.

—devaḥ N. of the father of Kṛṣṇa and son of Śūra, a descendant of

Yadu. -bhūḥ —sutaḥ &c. epithets of Kṛṣṇa.

—devatā, —devyā the asterism called Dhaniṣṭhā.

—devyā the ninth day of a lunar fortnight.

—dharmikā crystal.

—dhā 1. the earth; vasudheyamavekṣyatāṁ tvayā R. 8. 83; S. 7.

33. —2. the ground; Ku. 4. 4. -adhipaḥ a king. -dharaḥ a mountain; V. 1.

17. -nagaraṁ the capital of Varuṇa.

—dhārā, —bhārā the capital of Kubera.

—prabhā one of the seven tongues of fire.

—prāṇaḥ an epithet of Agni.

—retas m. fire.

—rocis m. a sacrifice; religious ceremony.

—śreṣṭhaṁ 1. wrought gold. —2. silver.

—ṣeṇaḥ N. of Karṇa.

—sthalī N. of the city of Kubere

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

vasu UṆĀDIS. 1, 11. 1) adj. (f. vasvī) «gut, trefflich» (= sādhu ŚABDAR.

imŚKDR.); «zu Gute kommend, wohlthuend»: vasormandānamandhasaḥ

ṚV. 8, 77, 1. vasvī te agne saṁdṛṣṭiriṣayate martyāya 6, 16, 25. vasuḥ

śaṁso narāṁ kārudhāyāḥ 24, 2. 44, 15. 5, 74, 10. mākudhryagindra śūra

vasvīrasme bhūvannabhiṣṭayaḥ 10, 22, 12. dhītayaḥ 3, 13, 5. dhī 10, 172,

2. śikṣā vayodho vasave su cetunā 9, 81, 3. devo

martairvasubhiridhyamānaḥ 5, 3, 8. vasvī ṣu te jaritre astu śaktiḥ 7, 20,

10. sūrya ĀŚV. GṚHY. 1, 3, 3. yajña ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 4, 12, 10. = svādu,

madhura «süss» H. an. 2, 590. fg. MED. s. 5. = śuṣka «trocken» H. an. Vgl.

vasiṣṭha und vasīyaṁs. — 2) m. a) Bez. «der Götter» überhaupt ṚV. 1,

106, 1. 143, 1. 3, 39, 8. 57, 2. 4, 55, 1. tamagnimaste vasavo nyṛṇvan 7,

1, 2. 39, 3. panthā devayānā vasubhiriṣkṛtāsaḥ 76, 2. 10, 37, 12.

sūrādaśvaṁ vasavo nirataṣṭa 1, 163, 2. 10, 100, 7. 87, 9. ā tvādya viśve

vasavaḥ sadantu 142, 6. 110, 3. VS. 8, 18. Insbes. die Āditya ṚV. 2, 27,

11. 7, 52, 1. 2. 8, 18, 15. 17. Agni AK. 3, 4, 30, 230. H. 1099. H. an. MED.

HALĀY. 1, 62. 5, 64. VIŚVA bei MALLIN. zu KIR. 1, 18. VAIJ. bei MALLIN.

zu KIR. 1, 46. ṚV. 1, 44, 3. 143, 6. 4, 5, 15. agniṁ taṁ manye yo vasuḥ 5,

6, 1. 24, 2. vaiśvānaro vasuragniḥ 51, 13. vasurvasupatirhi kamasyagne 8,

44, 24. yugānte sarvabhūtāni dagdhveva vasurulbaṇaḥ MBH. 7, 6865. die

Marut ṚV. 5, 55, 8. 6, 50, 4. 7, 56, 17. Indra 1, 110, 7. 4, 32, 14. 7, 31, 3.

4. AV. 7, 98, 1. Ushas ṚV. 6, 64, 1. die Aśvin 1, 158, 1. Rudra: śreṣṭho

devānāṁ vasuḥ 43, 5. vasurantarikṣasat (nach dem Comm. Vāyu; wohl

collectiv zu verstehen) 4, 40, 5. Viṣṇu MBH. 13, 7023. vasuḥ pūrvo

vasūnām R. 6, 102, 18. Kubera VIŚVA a. a. O. KIR. 1, 18. vasorvasupateḥ

PAÑCAR. 3, 7, 7. Śiva ANEKĀRTHAK. im ŚKDR. Indra MĀDH. im

KĀLANIRṆAYA. Vasu als Herr des Nakshatra Dhaniṣṭhā VARĀH. BṚH. S.

98, 5. unter den Viśvadevatā Verz. d. Oxf. H. 190,a,32. — b) eine Klasse

von Göttern, gewöhnlich neben den Āditya und Rudra, auch mit den Viśve

devāḥ (ṚV. 2, 3, 4. 10, 125, 1. AV. 1, 9, 1. 30, 1) und den Añgiras (ṚV. 7,

44, 4. AV. 2, 12, 4) genannt: unter die Götter des obersten Gebiets

gezählt NAIGH. 5, 6. NIR. 12, 41. ihr Haupt ist nach der ältesten Ansicht

Indra, nach der späteren Agni; gaṇa parśvādi zu P. 5, 3, 117. Vārtt. 2 zu

4, 1, 177. AK. 1, 1, 1, 5. 3, 4, 30, 230. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 5, 64. ṚV. 1,

45, 1. 58, 3. 2, 31, 1. 3, 8, 8. 6, 62, 8. 7, 10, 4. 35, 6. 14. 8, 35, 1. 90, 15.

9, 67, 27. 10, 48, 11. 66, 3. VĀLAKH. 6, 3. VS. 2, 5. 22. 5, 11. 11, 55. 58.

AV. 10, 7, 22. 9, 8. 10, 30. fg. 11, 6, 13. 19, 9, 11. AIT. BR. 3, 42. 8, 12.

Bṛhaspati mit den Vasu AV. 6, 73, 1. — TBR. 1, 5, 11, 2. 2, 1, 10, 1.

CHĀND. UP. 3, 16, 1. M. 11, 221. BHAG. 11, 6. 22. MBH. 3, 1840. 2356.

13, 7774 (vasūneṣa mit der ed. Bomb. zu lesen). 14, 2414. fgg. HARIV.

441. 3007. fgg. 11849. R. 3, 52, 42. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 56. PAÑCAR. 1,

11, 32. vasūnvadanti tu (vasu = pitṛviśeṣa MĀDH. im KĀLANIRṆAYA)

pitṝnrudrāṁścaiva pitāmahān. prapitāmahāṁstathādityān M. 3, 284. Agni

mit den Vasu AV. 19, 17, 1. TS. 2, 1, 11, 2. VS. 15, 10. AIT. BR. 3, 13.

ŚĀÑKH. BR. 22, 1. ŚR. 3, 6, 2. 4, 21, 8. TAITT. ĀR. 4, 6, 1. CHĀND. UP. 3,

6, 1. 3. 4. vasūnāṁ pāvakaścāsmi BHAG. 10, 23. vasūnāmiva havyavāṭ

MBH. 4, 50. 5, 5290. 13, 914. vasavo vāsavaṁ yathā paryupāsate R. 1, 7,

5. 4, 25, 34. 6, 112, 75. vasuḥ pūrvo vasūnām ist Viṣṇu 102, 18.

dreihundert und dreiunddreissig TS. 5, 5, 2, 5. acht AIT. BR. 1, 10. ŚAT.

BR. 4, 5, 7, 2. 6, 1, 2, 6. 11, 6, 3, 5. MBH. 1, 2710. 3914. fgg. HARIV.

6497. BURN. Intr. 605. Agni, Erde, Vāyu, Luft, Āditya, Himmel, Mond,

Sterne ŚAT. BR. 11, 6, 3, 6. Dhara, Dhruva, Soma, Ahan (Sāvitra, Āpas),

Anila, Anala (Vāyu), Pratyūṣa, Prabhāsa MBH. 1, 2582. 13, 7094.fg.

HARIV. 152. fg. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 312. VP. 120. Dhara (Manu die

ältere Ausg.), Dhruva, Viśvāvasu (Vivasvant die ältere Ausg.), Soma,

Parvata, Jogendra, Vāyu, Nirṛti (Nikṛti die ältere Ausg.) HARIV. 11538.

fgg. zehn Vasu, Indra der eilfte KĀṬH. 28, 3. Ind. St. 5. 240. fg.

dharmasya vasavaḥ putrāḥ MBH. 12, 7540. die Vasu (möglicher Weise

auch sg.) als Herren der achten Tithi VARĀH. BṚH. S. 99, 1. ein Vasu mit

Namen Vidhūma KATHĀS. 9, 23. fgg. — c) Bez. «der Zahl acht» (wegen

der «acht» Vasu) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 98, 1. 2. BṚH. 12, 1. GAṆITĀDHY.

SPAṢṬĀDHY. 23. Ind. St. 8, 228. 302. 314. vasutriguṇita, -gaṇārdhakoṇa

PAÑCAR. 3, 7, 7. vasau = aṣṭame Verz. d. Oxf. H. 102,a, No. 159, Z. 10.

— d) «Strahl» NAIGH. 1, 15 (vgl. NIR. 12, 41). AK. 3, 4, 30, 230. H. 100.

H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 39. 5, 64. VIŚVA und VAIJ. a. a. O. KIR. 1, 46.

ŚIŚ. 9, 10. — e) «die Sonne» ANEKĀRTHAK. im ŚKDR. «der Mond» MĀDH.

im KĀLANIRṆAYA. — f) «Strick, Seil, Gurt» (yoktra) TRIK. 3, 3, 447. H. an.

MED. — g) «Baum» H. 1114. — h) «eine best. Pflanze», = baka AK. 2, 4, 2,

62. MED. = pītamudga H. 1172. — i) «Teich, See» Comm. zu Uṇ. 1, 10. —

k) «ein best. Fisch» BHAR. zu AK. nach WILSON. — l) N. pr. eines Mannes

mit dem patron. Bhāradvāga, Liedverfassers von ṚV. 9, 80. fgg. unter den

sieben Weisen HARIV. 467. MĀRK. P. 94, 8. Sohn eines Manu HARIV.

415. 465. ein Sohn Uttānapāda’s 62. fg. ein Fürst der Cedi mit dem Bein.

Uparicara (als nṛpa, rājan bezeichnet H. an. MED.) MBH.1,2334.

fgg.3,11080 (S. 572). 12,12742. 12746. 13,328. 5650. 14,2828. fgg.

HARIV. 1612. 1804. 5252. 5254. 6598. 8815. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 43,8. 9. 68.

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 48,b,31. 80,b,40. BHĀG. P.9,22,5. kṛmīṇāmuddhato (kra-

ed. Calc.) MBH. 5, 2729. ein Sohn Īlina’s MBH. 1, 3708. Kuśa’s (vgl.

amāvasu) R. 1, 34. 3. 7. 8 (35, 2. 6. 7. GORR. das von ihm beherrschte

Land führt denselben Namen: deśo ‘yaṁ vasunāmāsīdvasoramitatejasaḥ).

BHĀG. P. 9, 15, 4. Vater des Paila MBH. 2, 1239. ein Sohn Vasudeva’s

BHĀG. P. 9, 24, 50. Kṛṣṇa’s 10, 61, 13. Vatsara’s 4, 13, 12. Hiraṇyareta’s

(zugleich Bez. seines Varsha) 5, 20, 15. Bhūtajyotis’ 9, 2, 17. fg. Naraka’s

10, 59, 12. ein König von Kāśmīra Verz. d. Oxf. H. 57,b,27. — 3) f. vasu a)

«Licht, Glanz» (dīpti). — b) «ein best. Arzeneimittel» (vṛddhauṣadha; lies

vṛddhyau-) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — c) N. pr. einer Tochter Daksha’s, Gattin

Dharma’s und Mutter der Vasu HARIV. 145. 12449 (Gattin Manu’s).

12479. VP. 119. BHĀG. P. 6, 6, 4. 10. — 4) f. vasvī «Nacht» NAIGH. 1, 7. —

5) n. a) «Gut, Besitzthum, Habe, Reichthum» (gen. vasvas, vasos und

vasunas in der älteren Sprache) AK. 2, 9, 90. 3, 4, 30, 230. H. 191. H. an.

MED. HALĀY. 1, 80. 5, 64. ṚV. 4, 17, 11. vasvo rāśim 20, 8. 6, 55, 3.

stotāraṁ maghavā vasau dhāt 4, 17, 13. kadā no gavye aśvye vasau dhāḥ

8, 13, 22. 7, 94, 9. jenya 2, 5, 1. 8, 90, 6. vāma 5, 19, 15. himmlisches

und irdisches «Gut» 1, 113, 7. 2, 14, 11. amṛta 3, 43, 5. 6, 45, 20. 59, 9. 9,

14, 8. 19, 1. īkṣe hi vasva ubhayasya 6, 19, 10. vasupatirvasūnām 4, 17,

6. 5, 4, 1. 6, 52, 5. 1, 27, 5. 109, 5. tubhyaṁ dhenuḥ sabardughā viśvā

vasūni dohate 134, 4. yasya viśvāni hastayoḥ pañca kṣitīnāṁ vasu 176, 3.

indramutsaṁ na vasunaḥ sicāmahe 2, 16, 7. vasu ratnā dayamāno vi

dāśuṣe 3, 2, 4. vasūnāṁ ca vasunaśca dāvane «Güter und Gut» 10, 50, 7.

AV. 7, 115, 2. 9, 4, 3. 10, 8, 20. anyeṣāṁ vindate vasu 14, 2, 8. VS. 4, 16.

6, 7. 8. 18, 15. ā dviṣato vasu datte AIT. BR. 4, 6. ŚAT. BR. 1, 6, 4, 5. 9,

3, 2, 4. 14, 7, 2, 29. saṁgamano vasūnām ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 1, 7. 3, 2. 4.

kośa iva vasunā (saṁpūrṇaḥ) MAITRJUP. 3, 4. pitryasya vasunaḥ M. 9,

163. 196. yaccānyanmamāsti vasu kiṁcana MBH. 3, 2161. 2276. 2297.

2309. 3036. vasu dattvā ca puṣkalam 2655. 13472. khaṇḍite ca vasuni

Spr. 2183. KATHĀS. 23, 26. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 682. BHĀG. P. 1, 18, 44

(vasos). 4, 14, 39. 16, 6. 17, 22. 9, 4, 6. 20, 25. divya PAÑCAR. 1, 11, 36.

vasunā nātipuṣṭo ‘bhavat DAŚAK. 67, 15. jito rājyaṁ vasūni ca MBH. 3,

2483. vasuṁdharā tasya bhavetsutuṣṭā dhārāṁ vasūnāṁ pramuñcatīva

13390. vasūnāṁ vimokṣaḥ R. 2, 23, 39. dhanaṁ dhānyaṁ vasūni ca 4, 35,

16. KIR. 1, 13. 18. BHĀG. P. 2, 7, 9. 3, 30, 3. 9, 24, 52. VET. in LA. (III) 9,

18. vasusaṁpūrṇā vasudhā MBH. 3, 2238. vasatiṁ vasusaṁpadām

KUMĀRAS. 6, 37. RĀJA-TAR. 6, 367. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 104, 40. BṚH. 24,

13. vasukāmo vasūn (yajeta) BHĀG. P. 2, 3, 3. RAGH. 9, 16. krayāṇakāni

vasūni «Güter, Waaren» VET. in LA. (III) 18, 21. bubhuje ‘kṣayyaṣaḍvasu

«die sechs Güter» so v. a. «die sechs Sinnengebiete» BHĀG. P. 9, 23, 25.

Als masc. (vgl. gaṇa ardharcādi zu P. 2, 4, 31, aber auch

SIDDH.K.248,b,12): vasavaśca vasūndivyān (daduḥ) PAÑCAR. 1, 11, 32.

— a) vasoṣpatiḥ m. etwa «der Genius der Besitzthümer», über einem

Todkranken angerufen, denselben bei seiner irdischen Habe zu erhalten:

vasoṣpate ni rāmaya mayyeva tanvaṁ1 mama Cit. in NIR. 10, 18, wofür

AV. 1, 1, 2 gelesen wird: mayyevāstu mayi śrutam «mir bleibe das

Gehör!» Nach MĀDH. im KĀLANIRṆAYA soll vasu auch = nivāsa (also von

5. vas) sein; wenn diese Bedeutung sich erweisen liesse, würde

vasoṣpatiḥ mit vāstoṣpatiḥ nahe zusammentreffen. — b) vasordhārā

«Strom der Güter» heisst, nach dem Anfange eines Spruches vasorme

dhārā, «eine» Ghṛta-«Spende beim» Agnicayana AV. 12, 3, 41. TS. 5, 4, 8,

1. 7, 3, 2. TBR. 3, 11, 9, 9. 10, 3. ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 2, 1. 3, 15. 10, 1, 5, 3.

ĀŚV. ŚR. 4, 8, 30. KĀTY. ŚR. 18, 5, 1. Verz. d. B. H. No. 1127.

vasordhārāhutaṁ haviḥ (vasordhārā = pātraviśeṣa NĪLAK.) MBH. 1, 8146.

WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 249. 299. 302. als Gattin Agni’s BHĀG. P. 6, 6, 13. als

Bez. «der himmlischen» Gangā: prāsādā yatra saubrarṇā vasordhārā (=

mandākinī NĪKAK.) ca yatra sā. gandharvāpsaraso yatra tatra yānti

sahasradāḥ.. MBH. 13, 3789. N. pr. eines Tīrtha 3, 5018. — b) «Gold» H.

1043. VIŚVA im ŚKDR. -varmadhara MBH. 3, 17165. — c) «Juwel,

Edelstein, Perle» (ratna, maṇi) AK. 3, 4, 30, 230. H. 1063. H. an. MED.

HALĀY. 2, 21. 5, 64. VAIJ. a. a. O. -mekhala PAÑCAR. 3, 7, 7. — d) «ein

best. Arzeneimittel», = vṛddhi H. an. MED. — e) «Wasser» VAIJ. a. a. O. —

f) = aśva MED. = śyāma ŚKDR. nach derselben Aut. — Vgl. akṣitā-,

antarvasu, arvā-, ā-, āghṛṇi-, ābharadvasu, āyadvasu, idadvasu, upā-,

citrā-, jenyā-, tvā-, divā-, dhiyā-, nirvasu, parā-, punarvasu, purā-, purū-,

puro-, pra-, prabhū-, bṛhadvasu, bhavadvasu, manā-, mayi-, mahā-,

mitrā-, mudā-, vājinī-, vidadvasu, vibhā-, viśvā-, vṛṣaṇvasu, śatadvasu,

saṁyadvasu, svā-.

vasu (von 5. vas) in saṁvasu.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

vasu 1 I A King named Uparicaravasu. For further details see under

Uparicaravasu).

vasu 2 II Aṣṭavasus. (The eight Vasus). (For further details see under

Aṣṭavasus).

vasu 3 III A son born to Kuśa, King of Kanyākubja by his wife Vaidarbhī.

Kuśa had four sons, Kuśāmba, Kuśanābha, Asūrtarajas and Vasu. Of

them Kuśāmba built the city of Kauśāmbī, Kuśanābha the city of

Mahodayapura, Asūrtarajas the city of Dharmāraṇya and Vasu the city of

Girivraja which is erected in the middle of five hills. The river Māgadhī

flows around this city. (Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa, Bālakāṇḍa Sarga 32).

vasu 4 IV A Vasu is mentioned in Brahmāṇḍa Purāṇa Chapter 58, as the

brother of Paraśurāma. Vasu, Rumaṇvān, Suṣeṇa, Viśvāvasu and

Paraśurāma were the five sons born to Jamadagni by his wife Reṇukā.

vasu 5 V A son of Murāsura. The sons of Murāsura were, Tāmra,

Antarīkṣa, Śravaṇa, Vasu, Vibhāvasu, Nabhasvān and Aruṇa. (Bhāgavata,

Skandha 10).

vasu 6 VI A mighty King of the Kṛmi dynasty. (Mahābhārata, Udyoga

Parva, Chapter 74, Stanza 13).

vasu 7 VII It is mentioned in Mahābhārata, Ādi Parva, Chapter 94, Stanza

17, that the King Īlina had five sons, Duṣyanta, Śūra, Bhīma, Pravasu and

Vasu by his wife Rathantarī.

vasu 7i VIII A scholarly Brahmin-hermit. The hermit Paila was the son of

this Vasu. (M.B. Sabhā Parva Chapter 33, Stanza 35).

vasu 1x IX Vasu is used as a synonym of Śiva in Mahābhārata,

Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 17, Stanza 140.

vasu x X A name of Mahāviṣṇu. (M.B. Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 149,

Stanza 25).

vasu xi XI A King. He was born to Uttānapāda by Sūnṛtā. A controversy

arose among hermits once, about cow-sacrifice and for a solution of the

problem the hermits approached this king Vasu, who told them his

perception that the sacrifice of cow was, strictly speaking, a matter of

slaughter and as such it was to be forbidden. As the hermits could not

agree with the King, they cursed him «Let the King go to Pātāla

(underworld). Vasu then did very severe penance and attained heaven.

(Matsya Purāṇa, 143, 18-25).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

vasu vasu,

I. adj.

1. Sweet.

2. Dry.

II. m.

1. A kind of demigod, Rām. 3, 52, 42; MBh. 1, 2582.

2. A name of Agni.

3. Śiva.

4. Kuvera, Kir. 1, 18.

5. The sun.

6. A ray of light, Śiś. 9, 10 (at the end of a comp. adj.; cf. 2. vas).

7. A rein.

8. The tie of a yoke.

9. A tree.

10. The name of two plants.

11. A kind of fish.

12. A proper name, Lass. 2. ed. 67, 21.

III. n.

1. Wealth, Lass. 100, 8 = Rigv. vii. 15, 4 (vasvas, ved. abl.); Nal. 5,

48; Daśak. in Chr. 184, 14.

2. Gold, MBh. 3, 13472.

3. A gem.

4. Water.

5. A sort of salt.

6. A yellow kind of kidney bean.

— Comp. punar-, m. 1. the seventh of the lunar asterisms, Ragh. 11, 36.

2. a name of Viṣṇu and Śiva, MBh. 12, 1511. purā-, m. a name of Bhīṣma.

mitrāvasu, i. e. mitra-, m. a proper name, Śāk. 79, 2. vibhā-, m. 1. the

sun, Lass. 2. ed. 78, 76. 2. the moon, Śṛṅgārat. 2. 3. fire.

— Cf. [greek] cf. vasna.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

vasu f. vasvī (& vasu) a. good, wholesome; m. E. of the gods or a class of

(8) gods, N. of sev. men; n. good, property, wealth, riches.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

vasu vas-u, a. [v-ī; bright: 1. vas] good, beneficent (V.); m. ep. of various

gods and of the gods in general; pl. the Vasus, a class of gods (their

number being usually eight; Indra is their chief, later Agni and Viṣṇu); ray

of light (C., rare); N.; n. goods, wealth, property (V., C., very common);

gold (C., very rare); gem, pearl (C., very rare).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

vasu klī, (vasatyaneneti . vasa + śṝsvṛsnihīti . uṇā° 1 . 11 . iti uḥ .)

ratnam . dhanam . ityamaraḥ .. (yathā, raghuḥ . 8 . 31 .

balamārtabhayopaśāntaye viduṣāṁ satkṛtaye bahuśrutam .

vasu tasya vibhorna kevalaṁ guṇavattāpi paraprayojanam ..)

vṛddhauṣadham . śyāmam . iti medinī . se, 6 .. hāṭakam . iti viśvaḥ ..

jalam . iti siddhāntakaumudyāmuṇādivṛttiḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

vasu na° vasa—u . 1 dhane 2 ratne amaraḥ 3 vṛddhyauṣadhe 4 śyāme

medi° . 5 svarṇe viśvaḥ 6 jale ca si° kau° . 7 vakavṛkṣe 8 sūrye 9 vahnau

10 raśmau 11 gaṇadevatābhede ca pu° amaraḥ . dharo dhruvaśca

somaśca ahaścaivānilo’nalaḥ . pratyūṣaśca prabhāsaśca vasavo’ṣṭāviti

smṛtāḥ bhā° ā° 66 a° . 12 aṣṭasaṅkhyāyāñca 13 madhure 14 śuṣke ca tri°

hemaca° . 15 dīptau 16 vṛddhyauṣadhau ca strī śabdaca° . 17

vasudevatāke dhaniṣṭhānakṣatre pu° jyo° ta° . 18 cedirājākhyedevabhede

व्याल — vyāla Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vyāla mfn. (prob. connected with «vyāḍa» q.v.) mischievous, wicked,

vicious

mfn. prodigal, extravagant

vyāla m. (ifc. f. «ā») a vicious elephant, Kav.

vyāla m. a beast of prey &c.

vyāla m. a snake &c.

vyāla m. a lion

vyāla m. a tiger

vyāla m. a hunting leopard

vyāla m. a prince, king

vyāla m. Plumbago Ceylanica

vyāla m. the second «dṛkāṇa» (q.v.) in Cancer, the first in Scorpio, and

the third in Pisces

vyāla m. a kind of metre

vyāla m. N. of the number «eight»

vyāla m. N. of a man (cf. «vyāḍa»)

vyāla n. N. of one of the three retrograde stages in the motion of the

planet Mars

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

vyāla a.

(1) Wicked, vicious; vyāladvipā yaṁtṛbhirunmadiṣṇavaḥ Śi. 12. 28;

yaṁtā gajaṁ vyālamivāparāddhaḥ Ki. 17. 25.

(2) Bad, villainous.

(3) Cruel, fierce, savage; Ki. 13. 4. —laḥ

(1) A vicious elephant; vyālaṁ bālamṛṇālataṁtubhirasau roddhuṁ

samujjṛṁbhate Bh. 2. 6.

(2) A beast of prey; varnaṁ vyālaniṣevitaṁ Rām.

(3) A snake; H. 3. 29.

(4) A tiger; Māl. 3.

(5) A leopard.

(6) A king.

(7) A cheat, rogue.

(8) N. of Viṣṇu.

— Comp.

—khaḍgaḥ, —nakhaḥ a kind of herb.

—grāhaḥ, —grāhin m. a snake-catcher.

—mṛgaḥ 1. a wild animal. —2. a hunting leopard.

—rūpaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

vyāla (vi’āla AV. Padap.) 1) adj. a) «tückisch, hinterlistig, boshaft,

bösartig»; = śaṭha AK. 3, 4, 26, 198. H. an. 2, 509. = khala MED. l. 48. =

dhūrta JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. Beiw. des Takman AV. 5, 22, 6. von

Elephanten: gajaṁ vyālam KIR. 17, 25. -dvipa ŚIŚ. 12, 28. -gaja KATHĀS.

37, 98. -vāraṇa 52, 118. avyālaceṣṭita ein Elephant R. 1, 6, 22 (25

GORR.). m. «ein tückischer Elephant» H. 1222. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 70.

Spr. 2920. — b) «verschwenderisch» HALĀY. 5, 46. — 2) m. a) «ein

tückischer Elephant»; s. u. 1) a.) — b) «Raubthier» AK. H. 1216. H. an.

MED. HALĀY. 5, 46. M. 1, 39. 43. MBH. 1, 1105. 7, 2239. R. 2, 95, 15.

SUŚR. 1, 4, 19. 24, 1. 89, 16. Spr. (II) 345. 3405. (I) 1740. — c)

«Schlange» AK. 1, 2, 1, 7. 3, 4, 26, 198. H. 1303. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 3,

18. MBH. 3, 11978. Spr. (II) 2655. (I) 2460. 2609. 2919. 5046. VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 19, 4. 33, 28. als Verzierung an Indra’s Banner 43, 57. 65. SĀH.

D. 54, 1. am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā RĀJA-TAR. 6, 88. — b) c)

unbestimmt ob «Raubthier» oder «Schlange» MBH. 3, 2355. 15668. 13,

5473. R. 2, 59, 10. 3, 55, 21. 5, 41, 37. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 16, 5. RĀJA-TAR.

8, 2188. BHĀG. P. 1, 6, 14. 4, 7, 28. 7, 8, 29. savyālā bhūḥ KĀM. NĪTIS. 4,

53. — d) «Löwe» H. an. «Tiger» und «Panther» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — e)

«König, Fürst» MATHUREŚA zu AK. nach ŚKDR. — f) Bez. «des zweiten

Decans im Krebse, des ersten im Scorpion und des dritten in den Fischen»

VARĀH. BṚH. 21 (19), 6. — g) «ein best. Metrum» COLEBR. Misc. Ess. 2,

164. Ind. St. 8, 408, N. 2. — h) N. pr. eines Mannes: -kula Verz. d. Oxf. H.

196,b,23. — 3) f. ī «Schlangenweibchen» MBH. 3, 16143. 16191. 5, 7071.

9, 579. 14, 2455. R. GORR. 2, 34, 9. 75, 17. 5, 26, 2. MṚCCH. 10, 19.

RAGH. 12, 32. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 221. — 4) n. Bez. «einer der 3 Stadien in

der retrograden Bewegung des Planeten Mars» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6, 3.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

vyāla vyāla,

I. adj.

1. Wicked, Kir. 17, 25.

2. Cruel.

II. m.

1. A snake, Hit. iii. d. 30.

2. A beast of prey, Pañc. i. d. 420.

3. A vicious elephant, Bhartṛ. 2, 6.

4. A rogue.

5. A king.

III. f. lī, A female snake, Chr. 22, 22.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

vyāla a. mischievous, malicious. m. a malicious elephant, beast of prey,

snake (f. vyālī).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

vyāla vyāla, a. treacherous, wicked, vicious (esp. of elephants); m.

vicious elephant; beast of prey; serpent: -grāha, -grāhin, m. snake-

catcher;

-tva, n. condition of a vicious elephant;

-mṛga, m. beast of prey.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

vyāla puṁstrī° vi + aḍa—ghañ ḍasya laḥ . 1 sarpe 2 hiṁsakapaśau

amaraḥ . striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 3 duṣṭagaje ca medi° 4 citrake vyāghre puṁstrī°

rājani° striyāṁ ṅīṣ . nṛpe pu° 5 mathureśaḥ . 6 śaṭhe tri° amaraḥ 7

dhūrte tri° .

सिन्धुर — sindhura Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sindhura m. an elephant

m. N. of the number eight

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

sindhura m. «Elephant» TRIK. 2, 8, 33. H. 1217. HĀR. 14. HALĀY. 2, 59.

RĀJA-TAR. 1, 300.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

sindhura sindhu + ra, m. An elephant.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

sindhura sindhu-ra, m. elephant;

-rāja, m. king of rivers, ocean; king of Sindh;

-ṣena, m. N. of a prince of Sindh;

-saṁgama, m. confluence with the sea, river mouth.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

sindhura puṁstrī° sindhurmadajalamasyāsti ra . hastini hemaca° striyāṁ

ṅīṣ madāndhasindhuraghaṭā gaṅgāstavaḥ .

  • Rating:
  • Views:109 views
  • Tags: -
  • Categories: Sanskrit

Comments

Write a comment

*